JP7472088B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed that are capable of executing a countdown notice, which is a pre-reading notice, and in which the countdown notice may be executed to the end or may end midway (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-58940 A

The technology described in Patent Document 1 leaves room for improvement in terms of increasing interest through presentation.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of players through its presentation.

The gaming machine of means A is
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a determination means for determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A specific effect execution means capable of starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means,
The specific performance execution means has, as an execution pattern of the specific performance, a plurality of first patterns in which a performance mode is inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination, and a second pattern in which a performance mode is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination,
The apparatus further includes a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that is different from a reach effect and that makes the specific effect invisible,
The specific performance execution means includes:
In the case where the special effect is executed and becomes invisible after starting the execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be ended without being resumed;
When the special effect is executed and becomes invisible after the execution of the specific effect is started in the first pattern and before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment , the specific effect can be resumed in the first pattern of a presentation mode in which a ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different from that before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment becomes invisible, before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment.
A gaming machine characterized by:

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards, etc. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a random number for gaming. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a special pattern process processing jump table. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process for performance control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a screen display configuration. A figure showing an example of the command configuration when the starting gate is entered. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern configuration. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance image display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance image display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance image display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance image display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance image display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance image display. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading performance setting process. A figure showing an example of how to use stored data related to the pre-reading performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a character movement performance determination process. A figure showing an example of how stored data is used for the character movement performance determination process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of determining a performance pattern. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of determining a performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer effect determination process. A figure showing an example of how data related to the timer performance determination process is used. A figure showing an example of how data related to the timer performance determination process is used. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during execution of a character movement performance. A figure showing an example of how stored data is used for processing during character movement performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during execution of a timer effect. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for starting change in a performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a determination regarding an active display change presentation. A figure showing an example of a decision regarding post-reach performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. A flowchart showing an example of processing during change of the performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting a character display ratio. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. A figure showing an example of execution control of an active display change presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. A figure showing an example of execution control of a performance that makes the performance pattern transparent. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. A figure showing an example of timer standby effect and timer effect execution control.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 1, they are provided on the right side of the game area. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can each variably display special symbols as multiple types of special identification information. Special symbols are also called "special symbols." The variable display of special symbols is also called "special symbol game." Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using 7-segment LEDs or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9," symbols indicating "-," or any other lighting pattern. The special symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a display of multiple types of special symbols that can be changed. For other symbols such as performance symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols, "variable display" also means a display of multiple types of symbols that can be changed. Performance symbols are also called decorative symbols or ornamental symbols. Variable display is also called variable display, or simply "change". Changes include updating multiple symbols, scrolling multiple symbols, and deforming, enlarging, or reducing one or more symbols. Changes may include a mode of displaying a symbol in a flashing manner. In the variable display of special symbols or normal symbols, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, multiple types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of any symbol, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a stop display as a display result at the end. Stop display is also called derived display, or simply derived. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in a variable display is also called the final stop symbol or the final symbol. The final stop symbol in a special symbol game is also called the final special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display result. The display result of the special symbol is also called the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol change time, which is the change time of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display time. The special symbol change time can be set to a different time corresponding to the change pattern of the special symbol, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern." The special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game." A special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display 20 can perform variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are also called "normal symbols". The variable display of normal symbols is also called "normal symbol game". The normal symbol display 20 is configured using 7-segment LEDs, etc. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and other arbitrary lighting patterns. The normal symbols may include a pattern in which some or all of the multiple LEDs are lit, or a pattern in which all of the multiple LEDs are turned off. The final stop symbol in the normal symbol game is also called a confirmed normal symbol. The display result of the normal symbol is also called a normal symbol display result. The execution time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol game is also called a normal symbol fluctuation time. The normal symbol variation time can be set to a different time depending on the normal symbol variation pattern, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), a dot matrix LED, a projector and screen, a stereoscopic image projection device, or any other device. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various types of performance images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to performance images, and can display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the performance pattern can be executed in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. The performance pattern is a display pattern showing numbers or the like, and is a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern and the normal pattern. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are provided, and the performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner, for example, by scrolling or updating the performance pattern in the vertical direction in synchronization with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game. The synchronization of the variable display may be a common timing for different types of patterns, between the timing when the pattern starts to change and the timing when the change ends and the pattern is finally stopped and displayed. The final stop pattern in the variable display of the performance pattern is also called the determined performance pattern, determined decoration pattern, or determined decoration pattern. Since the variable display of the performance pattern is synchronized with the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the variable display time of the performance pattern is the same as the special pattern change time.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area capable of displaying performance images corresponding to the pending display and the active display. The pending display is a display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed and is on hold. The active display is a display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display. A display area that performs a pending display is also referred to as a pending display area. A display area that performs an active display is also referred to as an active display area. The number of variable displays that are on hold is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories that corresponds to the first special game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories that corresponds to the second special game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 1. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory number by the number of lit LEDs. A regular pattern reserve indicator 25C, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, is provided above the regular pattern display device 20 shown in FIG. 1. The regular pattern reserve indicator 25C displays the regular pattern reserve number by the number of lit LEDs. The regular pattern reserve number is the reserve memory number corresponding to the regular pattern game.

Below the image display device 5, there are provided a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B. The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second start winning opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric role solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 2 as a normal electric role. The variable winning ball device 6B is equipped with, for example, an electric tulip-type role having a pair of movable wings, and when the normal electric role solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning opening is in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter, or in a normal open state in which game balls have difficulty entering the second start winning opening. When the normal electric device solenoid 81 is on, the variable winning ball device 6B has a movable wing piece in a tilted position, so that the second start winning port is in an open state where game balls can enter, or in an expanded open state where game balls can easily enter the second start winning port. The open state where game balls can enter the second start winning port, or the expanded open state where game balls can easily enter, is also called the first variable state. The closed state where game balls cannot enter the second start winning port, or the normal open state where game balls cannot easily enter, is also called the second variable state. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to one equipped with an electric tulip-type device, as long as it can be changed between the first and second variable states.

The entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also called the first start winning. The entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also called the second start winning. The game ball that entered the first start winning hole is detected by the first start winning hole switch 22A shown in FIG. 2. The game ball that entered the second start winning hole is detected by the second start winning hole switch 22B shown in FIG. 2. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three balls, are paid out, and the first reserved memory number can be updated so that it is incremented by one. However, if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit, the first reserved memory number is not updated even if the first start winning occurs. In response to the first reserved memory number being incremented by one, the first start condition is established, and the first special pattern game in which the special pattern is variably displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A becomes executable. When the second start winning occurs, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three balls, are paid out, and the second reserved memory count can be updated to increment by 1. However, if the second reserved memory count has reached its upper limit, the second reserved memory count is not updated even if the second start winning occurs. When the second reserved memory count is incremented by 1, the second start condition is met, and the second special symbol game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B becomes executable.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 1, general winning openings 10 are provided in two locations on the lower left of the game area. When a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example 10, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first path and a second path are provided as flow paths for game balls to flow down. The first path is mainly provided in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left area of the image display device 5 is also called the left game area or the left game area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also called the right game area or the right game area. The left game area and the right game area may be divided, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area or the arrangement of the game nails. Firing a game ball toward the left game area to make it flow down the first path is also called a left hit. Firing a game ball toward the right game area to make it flow down the second path is also called a right hit. The first path is also called a left hit path. The second path is also called a right hit path. The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared.

In response to the operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball launching device, a game ball is launched from the ball launching device and launched into the game area. When a game ball launched into the game area is guided to the left game area and flows down the first path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide to the second path in the right game area. When a game ball launched into the game area is guided to the right game area and flows down the second path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide to the first path in the left game area.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on a first path in the left-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on a second path in the right-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the second path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may also allow game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second path in the right-side play area have an easier time entering than game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area.

The second path in the right game area is provided with a passing gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50. The passing gate 41 forms a passing area through which game balls can pass. Game balls that pass through the passing gate 41 are detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. Based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, the normal reserved memory number can be added and updated, and variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 20 can be executed as a normal symbol game. The passing gate 41 can be configured as a normal symbol operation port through which game balls can enter. In this case, the gate switch 21 can be configured as a normal symbol operation port switch that can detect game balls that have entered the normal symbol operation port.

The special variable winning ball device 50 is a special electric device that forms a large winning port that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a large winning port solenoid 82. The upper part of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage with a passage width in the front and rear direction that allows the game ball to pass through. This guide path slopes downward from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on the front and back sides of the extended passage. In the center of the guide passage, a role entrance that serves as the large winning port is formed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front and rear directions is provided as a large winning port opening and closing member at a position where the large winning port can be opened and closed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a fixed member 53 that forms a fixed passage is provided in the part of the guide passage where the large winning port is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the large prize opening solenoid 82 and can move forward and backward to open and close the role entrance which becomes the large prize opening. In the special variable prize ball device 50, the game ball that enters the inside from the large prize opening is detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a V prize area 51 which is a specific area is provided as a prize area through which the game ball can pass. In addition, inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a normal area different from the V prize area 51 is provided. At the top of the V prize area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member which can switch the V prize area 51 between an open state and a closed state is provided as a V prize opening opening and closing member. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V prize area 51. When the V prize area 51 is in an open state, the game ball can pass through it, and when it is in a closed state, the game ball cannot pass through it. Game balls that pass through the V winning area 51 are detected by the specific area switch 24. Game balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 pass through the normal area. Game balls that pass through the V winning area 51 and game balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 but pass through the normal area are both detected by the discharge switch 26 and then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 50.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls, and numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an outlet is provided for game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes. Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for lighting up the game effects are provided around the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball operation handle that is operated by a player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the playing area using the ball launching device. The ball operation handle is also called an operation knob. At a specified position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, there is provided a ball supply tray that holds gaming balls paid out as prize balls or gaming balls lent out by a specified ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. The ball supply tray is also called the upper tray. Below the upper tray, there is provided a prize ball storage tray where prize balls paid out when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A can be held by the player and tilted, and is provided with a trigger button that the player can push and pull. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 2. The player can press the push button 31B. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 2. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting the player's operation and other actions, but other detection means may also be used.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display device 20. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being executed, the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately, so the normal game based on the passage is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the normal game, when a specific normal symbol, such as a normal winning symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal winning". On the other hand, when a normal symbol other than the normal winning symbol, such as a normal losing symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal losing". In the case of "normal winning", an opening control is performed to make the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state or an expanded opening state for a predetermined period. At this time, the second starting winning port is in an open state or an expanded open state.

When a game ball passes through and enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game can be started by the first special pattern display device 4A. When a game ball passes through and enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game can be started by the second special pattern display device 4B. Note that, during the period when the special pattern game is being executed or during the period when the game ball enters the start winning hole and a start winning occurs, the special pattern game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately, so the special pattern game based on the start winning is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the special pattern game, when a specific special pattern such as a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern becomes "jackpot". In contrast, when a predetermined special pattern, such as a small win pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "small win". Also, when a special pattern, such as a miss pattern, that is different from a big win pattern or a small win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "miss". Furthermore, when a special pattern, such as a time-saving pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time-saving". The special pattern may not include a time-saving pattern. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include "time-saving".

In the special game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot entry port formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time continues until the timing of the passage of a predetermined period, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the timing when the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot entry port reaches a predetermined number, whichever comes first. The predetermined period during which the jackpot entry port can be controlled to be in an open state is the upper limit period during which the jackpot entry port can be opened in one round, and is also called the open upper limit period. One cycle in which the jackpot entry port is in an open state in the jackpot game state is called a round or round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached, such as 15 times or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain prize balls by entering the game ball into the jackpot entry port. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit open period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

When the display result of the special pattern is a "jackpot", it includes multiple jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the jackpot entry port, such as the number of rounds and the maximum opening period, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, such as the normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state, are set to multiple different types, and a jackpot type is specified corresponding to each setting. The multiple jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, jackpot types that allow few prize balls to be obtained, or jackpot types that allow almost no prize balls to be obtained, or may include jackpot types with the same number of prize balls that can be obtained. Controlling to a jackpot game state based on the display result of the special pattern being a "jackpot" is also called a pattern jackpot, a jackpot with a special pattern, a variable display jackpot, or a direct hit jackpot.

In the special game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to a small hit game state. In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small hit game state, the large winning opening may be opened in the same opening state as the large winning game state in some large hit types. The large winning opening may be opened in the same opening state by having the same number of openings and opening period. Alternatively, in the small hit game state, the large winning opening may be opened in an opening state different from the large hit game state. As with the large hit type, multiple small hit types may be included even when the display result of the special pattern becomes "small hit". The large hit type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the large winning opening in the small hit game state is also called the starting operation. When the special variable winning ball device 50 is in a small winning state, the special variable winning ball device 50's role entrance, which is the large winning opening, is opened, and when the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the conditions for a big win are met, and control to the big win game state is possible. When the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 in the small winning game state, control to the big win game state based on the occurrence of a V win is also called a small win via big win.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in accordance with the jackpot type. In addition, in the special game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "time-saving", the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to a time-saving state. The time-saving state is a game state in which the second special pattern game by the second special pattern display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special pattern game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second start winning hole than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning hole is also called base control. The base control in the normal state is also called normal base control or low base control. The base control in the time-saving state includes high base control. In addition to the high base control, the time-saving state may include medium base control. The medium base control is a base control that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than the low base control, but makes it harder for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than the high base control. The game state in which the medium base control is performed is also called the medium base state. The game state in which the high base control is performed is also called the high base state. The high base control is also called the high opening control.

In the normal state, medium base state, and high base state, it is possible for the time-saving pattern to be displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern. However, in the medium base state and high base state, even if the time-saving pattern is displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern, base control based on the time-saving pattern is not performed, and new control to transition to the medium base state or high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, it is possible to perform time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time more than in the normal state. For this reason, the time-saving state is also called the time-shortening state.

The time-saving state is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, so it is included in the special states that are advantageous to players and different from the jackpot game state. When the game state is the probability variable state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variable control is possible in which the probability of the display result of the special symbol being a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. As a result, the probability variable state is also called a probability variable state. The probability variable state is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of the special symbol is improved and it is easy to become a "jackpot", so it is included in the special states that are advantageous to players and different from the jackpot game state. The time-saving state and probability variable state continue until one of the predetermined end conditions is met first, such as the execution of a specified number of special symbol games or the control being made to the next jackpot game state. The end condition is that the specified number of special symbol games have been executed, also called the number-cut. The number-cut time-saving state is also called the number-cut time-cut. The number-cut probability variable state is also called the number-cut probability variable.

The normal game state is a game state that is not included in advantageous states such as a big win game state that is advantageous to the player, predetermined states such as a small win game state, or special states such as a time-saving state or a probability change state. The normal state is a game state in which the probability that the display result in a normal game will be a "normal win" and the probability that the display result in a special game will be a "jackpot" are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is the control state after the initial setting process is performed without performing the specified recovery process after power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed.

The state in which the probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a probability variable state as a gaming state.

After the small win game state ends, there are cases where the game state is controlled to a big win game state based on the occurrence of a V win, and cases where a V win does not occur and the game state before the small win game state remains unchanged. However, when the display result of the special game becomes a "small win" and a specified number of special games are played in the number cutoff, the control of the time-saving state and the probability of winning state ends and the game returns to the normal state. Note that the pachinko game machine 1 may not include a small win game state as a game state. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include a "small win".

When a time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is established, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state. Such a time-saving state is also called a rescue time-saving state. The time-saving condition may be a condition that can be established when, after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, after a jackpot occurs, or after the display result of the special game becomes "time-saving," control to a new jackpot game state or time-saving state is not performed even if the variable display is executed a specific number of times.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. These effects include effects that notify the progress of the game and effects that liven up the game. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, vibrating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, and may be executed using any effect device.

The effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of the effect patterns. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the variable display of the effect patterns is started in the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5. When the determined special pattern that is the display result in the first special game or the second special game is stopped and displayed, the determined effect pattern that is the display result is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the effect patterns. The determined effect pattern is composed of a combination of three effect patterns corresponding to the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the effect patterns, the display mode in the variable display of the effect patterns may become a reach mode. The reach mode is a mode in which the effect patterns that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute part of a jackpot combination and the fluctuation of the effect patterns that have not yet stopped continues. When the display pattern of the variable display of the performance symbols becomes a reach pattern, it is said that a reach has been achieved.

When the variable display of the performance pattern becomes a reach state, a reach performance can be executed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute multiple types of reach performance so that the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" varies when the performance state differs. The rate of a "jackpot" corresponding to the performance state is also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate. Reach performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, it may include a short reach and a long reach, which has a longer execution time than a short reach, corresponding to the execution time of the reach performance.

When the display result of the special pattern is "jackpot", a fixed performance pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a display result of the performance pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same performance pattern, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", is displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", may be displayed stopped. In the case of a "non-probability jackpot" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "6", may be displayed stopped. A "non-probability jackpot" is also called a "normal jackpot". In this case, the odd-numbered performance patterns are also called probability jackpot patterns. The even-numbered performance patterns are also called non-probability jackpot patterns or normal patterns. After a non-variable symbol is in a reach state, an advancement effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "variable jackpot."

When the display result of the special pattern is a "small win", a confirmed performance pattern that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a stopped result of the performance pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same performance pattern, such as a performance pattern showing a number other than "7", may be displayed stopped on a predetermined valid line in the "left", "middle", and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A common confirmed performance pattern may be displayed when the display result of the special pattern is a "big win" and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special pattern is a "miss", the display result may be displayed as a stop without the variable display of the performance pattern becoming a reach state. In this case, the fixed performance pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as a stop as the display result of the performance pattern. A display result in which the fixed performance pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as a stop without becoming a reach state is also called a non-reach miss. When the display result of the special pattern is a "miss", the variable display of the performance pattern may become a reach state, and the display result may be displayed as a stop after the reach performance is executed. In this case, the display result of the performance pattern may be displayed as a fixed performance pattern of the reach combination that is not a big hit combination or a small hit combination. A display result in which the fixed performance pattern of the reach combination is displayed as a stop after becoming a reach state is also called a reach miss.

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include variable display compatible displays such as reserved displays and active displays. In addition, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability can be executed while the performance pattern is variable displayed. The preview effect may include a variable preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display before execution whose execution is on hold. The look-ahead preview effect may be capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of a variable display compatible display such as reserved displays and active displays to a mode different from normal.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it may be possible to temporarily stop the performance symbols during the variable display of the performance symbols, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which one variable display appears as multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive performance may be set so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the number of times the variable display is resumed after the performance symbols are temporarily stopped is large than when the number of times is small. In the variable display of the performance symbols, there may be cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed before the reach state is reached, and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the reach state is reached. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, it may be possible to execute the pseudo consecutive performance at multiple times.

During control of the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot performance can be executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the number of rounds and an advancement performance that suggests or notifies the player that the advantage of the jackpot gaming state will improve. During control of the small jackpot gaming state, a small jackpot performance can be executed to notify the player of the small jackpot gaming state. By executing a common performance during control of the jackpot gaming state and during control of the small jackpot gaming state, it may be possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small jackpot gaming state.

In a non-playing state where a special game or the like is not being executed and no game is progressing, a demonstration effect image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A demonstration effect image is also called a demo image. The display of a demo image is also called a demo display. The effect by the demo display is also called a customer waiting demo effect.

(Board configuration)
2, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The progress of the game includes the execution of various games and transitions of game states, such as the execution of special games with reserved management, the execution of regular games with reserved management, big win game state, small win game state, time-saving state, and probability change state. The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and can be configured with a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. The ROM 101, the RAM 102, and a part or all of the random number circuit 104 may be configured to be external to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured to be built into the game control microcomputer 100. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, start port switches such as a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric role solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in the ROM 101 includes table data constituting tables used for variation patterns, performance control commands, and various other settings, judgments, and decisions. The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a temporary storage device that provides a stack for saving work areas and data used for game control. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that stores the contents of part or all of the memory area so that they can be restored within a specified period even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes a memory area capable of storing various data used for game control, such as a counter, a timer, a buffer, and a storage area for various other codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to the programs stored in the ROM 101.

The random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the progress of the game. The random numbers used when controlling the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. Some or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103.

Figure 3 shows an example of a gaming random number. The gaming random numbers include a random number MR1-1 for determining special symbols, a random number MR1-2 for winning symbols, a random number MR1-3 that serves as the initial value for winning symbols, a random number MR2-1 for normal winning symbols, a random number MR2-2 that serves as the initial value for normal winning symbols, a random number MR3-1 for normal symbol variation patterns, a random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing performance, a random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR3-4 for a variation pattern.

The random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol is used to determine the display result of the special symbol, such as whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a "big hit" or whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a "small hit". The random number MR1-2 for the winning symbol is used to select a confirmed special symbol from multiple special symbols, such as a big hit symbol when the display result of the special symbol is a "big hit" or a small hit symbol when the display result of the special symbol is a "small hit". The random number MR1-3, which is the initial value for the winning symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2. The random number MR2-1 for the winning normal symbol is used to select a confirmed normal symbol from multiple normal symbols to be displayed when the display result is a "normal hit" in the variable display of the normal symbol. The random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for the winning normal symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR2-1. The random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern of the normal symbol to one of multiple patterns prepared in advance. The random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect is used to select whether or not the variable display of the effect pattern will be in a reach state when the display result of the special symbol is a "miss". The random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is used to select the variation pattern type of the special symbol. The variation pattern type of the special symbol is a group that classifies the variation patterns of the special symbol in advance based on, for example, the performance state during the variable display of the effect pattern, and may be configured to include one or multiple variation patterns. The random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol.

When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, such as numerical data indicating the value of a gaming random number, the CPU 103 reads out and references various tables from the ROM 101. Even if random number values are not used, the necessary tables may be read out and referenced from the ROM 101 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, and the like.

The I/O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100 includes an input port to which various signals are input, and an output port to which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. The various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 may include signals for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reserved display device 25A, the second reserved display device 25B, the normal reserved display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals for driving the normal electric role solenoid 81, the large prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 transmits a presentation control command according to the progress of the game to the presentation control board 12 as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game by the game control microcomputer 100. The presentation control command is a command that specifies or notifies the progress of the game. The presentation control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control command may include commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11, such as the display result of the special game, the type of win, and the variation pattern, commands that specify the status of the game, such as the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, and the game status, and commands that specify the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and controlling the performance based on the received performance control commands. The performances that can be controlled by the performance control board 12 include various performances according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also various notifications such as error notifications and notifications of power outage recovery. The performance control board 12 comprises a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of performance together with the display control unit 123. This processing is for implementing the various functions of the performance control board 12, and includes determining the performance to be executed. The performance control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data from various tables, and also uses the RAM 122 as its main memory. The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and controls the execution of mainly display-related effects based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates the on/off state of the game effect lamp 9. The supply of the sound designation signal and the lamp signal enables the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on or off of the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal for operating the movable body 32 to a motor or solenoid of the movable body 32, or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the performance control board 12.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the execution of various performances. The random numbers used when controlling the execution of performances are also called performance random numbers. The performance random numbers may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the performance control CPU 120. When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, such as numerical data indicating the values of performance random numbers, the performance control CPU 120 reads out and refers to various tables from ROM 121. Even when random number values are not used, the performance control CPU 120 may read out and refer to the necessary tables from ROM 121 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

The I/O 125 is configured to include an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A, and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 may include an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14.

The sound control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on a sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and turns the game effect lamp 9 on or off in the manner designated by the lamp signal. In this way, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on a signal from the display control unit 123. Note that the control of the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp, such as the supply of the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, and the control of the movable body 32, such as the supply of a signal to operate the movable body 32, may be performed in part or in whole by the performance control CPU 120. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or, unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, DC 12V or DC 5V, etc.). The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending the power supply by operating the power switch 91. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 takes in a reset signal, a power off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value continues for the power-off reference time or longer. The clear signal is turned on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the CPU 103 executes main processing for game control.

Figure 4 is a flow chart showing the main processing P_MAIN for game control executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the main processing P_MAIN for game control shown in Figure 4 is started, the CPU 103 executes the power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON (step S1), and then executes the RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK (step S2). The power supply start response processing P_POWER_ON in step S1 can execute the initial setting of the game control microcomputer 100 in response to the start of power supply in the pachinko game machine 1. The initial setting of the game control microcomputer 100 may include the initialization of the output port, the setting of the interrupt vector, the setting of the built-in device register, and the setting of the specific register. The RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK in step S2 includes a checksum calculation processing, and compares the checksum data obtained as a result of the processing with the stored data in the checksum buffer. If the two data match, it is determined that the stored contents in the RAM 102 are normal.

Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, there is normal stored data in the checksum buffer, and the stored contents in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM are normal. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The checksum buffer stores the checksum data calculated in the checksum calculation process when the backup judgment time was measured by the backup monitoring timer at the time of the previous power outage. When the time value of the backup monitoring timer does not match the specific value corresponding to the backup judgment time, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored data in the game work area in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and data errors by the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK in step S2.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), the backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET is executed (step S4). The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET uses the backup command transmission table to enable the performance control command corresponding to the backup to be sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET also clears the process code, timer, counter, and flag specified by the backup setting table to enable initialization.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET is executed (step S5). The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables the transfer of clear data to the game work area, which is the working area in RAM 102. This initializes the game work area in RAM 102. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET then uses the initialization command transmission table to enable the transmission of the performance control command corresponding to the initialization from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET also clears the buffers, timers, pointers, and counters specified by the initialization setting table, making them initializeable.

Then, the control start setting process P_STACON is executed (step S6). The control start setting process P_STACON may include a wait process. The wait process executes a loop process and waits until the set waiting time has elapsed, thereby ensuring that the sub-boards such as the performance control board 12 can be started. The control start setting process P_STACON may also include a specific number of command transmission process or a command transmission process for chip individual number information. The specific number of command transmission process enables a performance control command that specifies the count value of the specific number counter when the power is turned on to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The specific number counter is provided at a specified address in the RAM 102, and may be capable of counting the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number corresponding to the time-saving condition. The command transmission process for chip individual number information enables a performance control command that specifies the stored value of the chip individual number register to be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The chip individual number register is included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 100, and it is sufficient if it is capable of storing a different value assigned to each chip as the chip individual number.

The control start setting process P_STACON may include a start-up out-of-area process. The start-up out-of-area process is a process executed by reading out a program stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 101 in response to the start-up of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to the start of power supply. The start-up out-of-area process may be, for example, a performance display RWM initial value setting process. The performance display RWM initial value setting process makes it possible to set an initial value for performing an initial display by a 7-segment LED constituting the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor may be mounted on, for example, the main board 11, and may display contents related to the setting value and contents related to the base. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a setting change state in which the settings can be changed, the setting value can be changed to one of a number of stages, for example, six stages, and makes it possible to set the probability that the display result of the special pattern will be a "jackpot". The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball passes through each winning hole, such as the start winning hole, the general winning hole, and the big winning hole, by the number of game balls released into the game area.

After the control start setting process P_STACON in step S6, the timer interrupt counter setting is performed (step S7). In step S7, the PTC counter output value is set so that a regular timer interrupt occurs at a predetermined time interval, for example, 4 [ms (milliseconds)]. After that, the main process P_MAIN for game control enters a loop process. In this loop process, interrupt prohibition is set (step S8), the random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination is executed (step S9), and the loop outside area process P_REGOUT is executed (step S10), and then interrupt permission is set (step S11), and the process returns to step S8. Then, when the interrupt permission state is in effect, the CPU 103 is able to execute timer interrupt processing each time an interrupt request signal is input from the PTC to the CPU 103. This allows the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined time, for example, 4 [ms], has elapsed.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control. In the timer interrupt processing P_PCT shown in Figure 5, power-off processing P_POWER_OFF is executed (step S51). Next, it is determined whether the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is "0" (step S52). When magnetism is detected by the magnet sensor or when radio waves are detected by the frame radio wave sensor, the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "1", which corresponds to the on state. In all other cases, the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the off state.

If the fraud monitoring flag is "1" (step S52; No), the game stop process P_GAME_STOP is executed (step S53). The game stop process P_GAME_STOP may be a process that initializes the output port and turns off the output of the connection confirmation signal. The connection confirmation signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board, and if it is in the off state, the execution of the payout process in the payout control board is stopped.

When the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is "0" (step S52; Yes), switch processing P_SW is executed (step S54), switch error notification processing P_CON_CHK is executed (step S55), random number update processing P_RANDOM is executed (step S56), and random number update processing for initial value determination P_TFINIT is executed (step S57). In addition, special symbol process processing P_TPROC is executed (step S58), normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is executed (step S59), information output processing P_JYOUHOU is executed (step S60), prize ball processing P_PAY is executed (step S61), and display processing P_HYOUZI is executed (step S62). Furthermore, other timer interrupt response processing is executed (step S63). After that, interrupt permission is set (step S64), and then the timer interrupt processing P_PCT ends.

The power-off process P_POWER_OFF in step S51 judges the power confirmation signal transmitted from the power supply board 17, and enables checksum calculation processing and the like to be executed when the power is off. The switch process P_SW in step S54 judges the state of the input port, and enables updating of the switch-on buffer and the like. The switch error notification process P_CON_CHK in step S55 can update the count value of a sensor-on counter specified, for example, by a switch error notification judgment table, and enables error notification display when the count value reaches a sensor abnormality error judgment value. The random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56 enables those of the game random numbers that will become software random numbers to be updated by software. The random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination in step S57 enables those of the game random numbers that are used as random number initial values to be updated by software.

The special symbol process P_TPROC in step S58 includes processes related to the variable display of special symbols and the game state, such as the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, and the control of the game state. The normal symbol process P_FPROC in step S59 includes processes related to the variable display of normal symbols and the state control of the second start winning port, such as the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and the opening and closing control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal hit". The information output process P_JYOUHOU in step S60 sets the information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information such as big win information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. The big win information indicates the number of big wins, etc. The start information indicates the number of start winnings, etc. The probability fluctuation information indicates the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc. The prize ball processing P_PAY in step S61 includes a prize ball command output counter addition process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter addition process uses a prize ball number table to determine whether the switch is on, and when on is detected, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects a process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the payout of prize balls based on the detection of game balls. The display process P_HYOUZI in step S62 sets the display by the first reserve indicator 25A, the second reserve indicator 25B, the regular reserve indicator 25C, and various other status indicator lights.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S58 shown in Figure 5 as the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The CPU 103 sets the first start winning corresponding flag in the special symbol process processing P_TPROC (step S101). The first start winning corresponding flag setting reflects the state of the first start port switch 22A included in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 by executing a logical operation command or the like. At this time, the zero flag in the flag register being in the on state indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is in the off state. In contrast, the zero flag being in the off state indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is in the on state. Next, the first start port winning table is set by a transfer command for setting the table pointer (step S102). Then, it is determined whether the first start winning corresponding flag is on (step S103). If the first start winning corresponding flag is on (step S103; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S104).

If the first start winning corresponding flag is off in response to step S103 (step S103; No), or after the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104, the second start winning corresponding flag is set (step S105). The second start winning corresponding flag is set by executing a logical operation command or the like to reflect the state of the second start port switch 22B contained in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103. At this time, the zero flag in the flag register being on indicates that the second start winning corresponding flag is off. In contrast, the zero flag being off indicates that the second start winning corresponding flag is on. Next, the second start port winning table is set by a transfer command for setting the table pointer (step S106). Then, it is determined whether the second start winning corresponding flag is on (step S107). If the second start winning corresponding flag is on (step S107; Yes), the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S108).

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first start port winning table set in step S102 to update the first reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number by adding 1 if the first reserved memory number is less than the upper limit, extracts the random number MR1-1 for determining the special pattern, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss performance, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern, stores them in their respective random number buffers, and then transfers them to the first special pattern reserved buffer. In addition, the first reserved memory information designation command transmission table is used to enable the first reserved memory information designation command, which designates the first reserved memory number, to be sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Then, a value indicating "1" is stored in the start port winning buffer as the start port winning designation value.

The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second start port winning table set in step S106 to update the second reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number by adding 1 if the second reserved memory number is less than the upper limit, extracts the random number MR1-1 for determining the special pattern, the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss performance, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern, stores them in their respective random number buffers, and then transfers them to the second special pattern reserved buffer. In addition, the second reserved memory information designation command transmission table is used to enable the second reserved memory information designation command, which designates the second reserved memory number, to be sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Then, a value indicating "2" is stored in the start port winning buffer as the start port winning designation value.

A common start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON can be executed in steps S104 and S108. Meanwhile, the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first start port winning table set in step S102, whereas the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second start port winning table set in step S106. In this way, the common start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed using different start port winning tables. Therefore, different data settings and controls are possible by the common process when the game ball enters the first start port and when it enters the second start port. The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON may include a winning performance process using the extracted game random number.

If the second start winning flag is off in response to step S107 (step S107; No), or after the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the special symbol process jump table (step S109). The special symbol process jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process that corresponds to the read value of the special symbol process code. The special symbol process code can be updated to any of 00[H] to 0B[H] in response to the progress of game control in the pachinko game machine 1, and is also called the special symbol process code. Here, [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. Note that [B] can also be used to indicate a binary number.

Following step S109, a transfer command to read out stored data is used to load the special symbol process code (step S110). Next, the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC is executed (step S111) to obtain the address of the process selected in accordance with the special symbol process code. The address obtained at this time is set in the pointer. After this, the process pointed to by the pointer is executed in accordance with a subroutine call command (step S112), making it possible to execute the process selected in accordance with the special symbol process code. When the process selected in this manner ends and a return command is issued to return to the special symbol process process P_TPROC, this special symbol process process P_TPROC also ends, and a return command is issued to return to the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control.

Figure 7 shows a configuration example TT01 of a special symbol process jump table used in the special symbol process P_TPROC. The special symbol process jump table is configured to include table data that can set the address of the process selected corresponding to the special symbol process code in an internal register of the CPU 103 used as a pointer. The special symbol process jump table of the configuration example TT01 includes special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL when the special symbol process code is 00 [H], special symbol fluctuation processing P_TSTART when the special symbol process code is 01 [H], special symbol stop processing P_TSTOP when the special symbol process code is 02 [H], small win opening pre-processing P_TLFAN when the special symbol process code is 03 [H], small win opening mid-processing P_TLOPEN when the special symbol process code is 04 [H], small win opening post-processing P_TLCLSF when the special symbol process code is 05 [H], and ... It includes table data that allows the pointer to be set to an address value corresponding to the following: small win discharge ball waiting process P_TLOUT when the separate pattern process code is 06 [H], small win end process P_TLEND when the special pattern process code is 07 [H], large prize opening pre-opening process P_TINT when the special pattern process code is 08 [H], large prize opening open process P_TOPEN when the special pattern process code is 09 [H], large prize opening post-opening process P_TCLSF when the special pattern process code is 0A [H], and large win end process P_TEND when the special pattern process code is 0B [H].

The special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL makes it possible to determine whether or not to start a special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reserved information, to determine the special symbol display result using the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol, to determine the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state in the variable display of the special symbol, and to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol display result includes "jackpot", "small hit", "miss", etc., and when it is determined to be a "jackpot", it is decided to control to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. Also, when the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot", it is decided which of multiple types of jackpot game states with different degrees of advantage for the player the jackpot game state to be controlled to is to be set to, depending on the jackpot symbol that is the confirmed special symbol. Therefore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the state to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can determine which of multiple types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player to control to. Furthermore, by executing the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine one of multiple types of variation patterns.

The special pattern change process P_TSTART measures the time that has elapsed since the special pattern began to change on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, and makes it possible to determine whether the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed. The special pattern stop process P_TSTOP measures the time that has elapsed since the special pattern stopped changing on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, and makes it possible to determine whether the pattern stop time has elapsed. The pattern stop time may be set as the time for stopping the special pattern to be displayed when it is determined in the special pattern change process P_TSTART that the special pattern change time has elapsed. When the pattern stop time has elapsed, the special pattern process code is updated and various settings are made according to the special pattern display result. For example, if the special chart display result is a "big win," the special chart process code can be updated to 08 [H], if the special chart display result is a "small win," the special chart process code can be updated to 03 [H], and if the special chart display result is a "miss," the special chart process code can be updated to 00 [H].

Processing before small win opening P_TLFAN, processing during small win opening P_TLOPEN, processing after small win opening P_TLCLSF, waiting for small win ball ejection P_TLOUT, and processing after small win end P_TLEND are processes for controlling the progress of the game in the small win game state. Processing before large win opening P_TINT, processing during large win opening P_TOPEN, processing after large win opening P_TCLSF, and processing after big win end P_TEND are processes for controlling the progress of the game in the big win game state.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, a description will be given of the main operations of the performance control board 12. In the performance control board 12, when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 17 or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process.

Figure 8 is a flowchart showing the main processing S_MAIN for performance control executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the performance control board 12. When the main processing S_MAIN for performance control shown in Figure 8 is started, the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control initialization processing S_INIT (step S71). The performance control initialization processing S_INIT includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and register settings for the timer circuit mounted on the performance control board 12. Next, the initial operation control processing S_SYOKI is executed (step S72). The initial operation control processing S_SYOKI makes it possible to control the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as controlling the movable body 32 to return to its initial position and controlling the predetermined operation check. Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time, such as 2 [ms (milliseconds)], has elapsed based on the register setting for the timer circuit. If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and the system waits.

When the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process S_COMMAND is executed (step S75), the performance control process process S_CPROC is executed (step S76), the performance random number update process S_RANDOM is executed (step S77), and the performance output process S_OUT is executed (step S78). Then, other timer interrupt response processes are executed (step S79), and the process returns to step S73.

The command analysis process S_COMMAND in step S75 enables the reading of the performance control command stored in the performance control command receiving buffer and the setting and control corresponding to the read performance control command. By executing the command analysis process S_COMMAND, the performance control CPU 120 can update the storage data indicating the state of the flag, the storage data of the register, and any other storage data in the working area of the RAM 122 in response to the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11. The performance control process process S_CPROC in step S76 enables the execution of performances using various performance devices, including, for example, the display of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the decorative light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the drive control of the movable body 32. The control contents of the performances using various performance devices may be judged, determined, set, etc. based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the execution result of the processing by the performance control CPU 120. The performance random number update process S_RANDOM in step S77 enables at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 to be updated by executing a software program.

Figure 9 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S76 shown in Figure 8 as the performance control process processing S_CPROC. The performance control CPU 120 executes the look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET in the performance control process processing (step S151). The look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET enables judgment, decision, and setting regarding the execution of a look-ahead preview performance, for example, based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. The look-ahead performance setting processing S_SAKI_SET also makes it possible to update the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After the pre-read effect setting process S_SAKI_SET in step S151, a transfer command that sets a pointer sets the effect control process jump table (step S152). The effect control process jump table is an address management table that selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the effect control process code. The effect control process code can be updated to any of 00 [H] to 0A [H] in accordance with the progress of effect control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also called the effect process code. The effect control process code is loaded by a transfer command for reading out stored data (step S153). The address of the process to be selected corresponding to the effect control process code thus obtained is set in the effect control pointer (step S154). Therefore, by executing the process pointed to by the effect control pointer (step S115), the process selected corresponding to the effect control process code becomes executable.

Figure 9 (B) shows an example configuration TT02 of a performance control process processing jump table used in the performance control process processing S_CPROC. The performance control process processing jump table is configured to include table data that can set the address of the processing selected corresponding to the performance control process code in a register used as a performance control pointer. The presentation control process jump table of the configuration example TT02 includes table data that can set address values corresponding to the following in the presentation control pointer: waiting for a change pattern command when the presentation control process code is 00 [H], starting presentation pattern change when the presentation control process code is 01 [H], processing during presentation pattern change when the presentation control process code is 02 [H], stopping presentation pattern change when the presentation control process code is 03 [H], displaying small wins when the presentation control process code is 04 [H], processing during small win opening when the presentation control process code is 05 [H], ending presentation of small wins when the presentation control process code is 06 [H], displaying big wins when the presentation control process code is 07 [H], processing during a round when the presentation control process code is 08 [H], post-round processing when the presentation control process code is 09 [H], and ending presentation of big wins when the presentation control process code is 0A [H].

The waiting for receiving a variation pattern command process makes it possible to determine whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 has been received. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received, the performance control process code is updated to 01 [H] corresponding to the performance pattern variation start process, and if it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received, the demo display can be controlled. The performance pattern variation start process makes it possible to start a variation-time performance corresponding to a special game. For example, in response to a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it makes it possible to select a performance pattern used to control the variation-time performance and to start updating the performance process timer that measures the performance execution time. The performance pattern variation process makes it possible to control the switching timing of each performance element that constitutes the performance pattern, and makes it possible to determine whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the measured value of the performance process timer. If it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance control process code is updated to 03 [H] corresponding to the performance pattern variation stop process. The performance pattern change stop process enables the end control of the performance during change and the display control of the performance result corresponding to the determined special pattern based on the establishment of the end condition of the performance during change, such as the elapse of the performance execution time or the reception of a performance pattern determination command. At this time, the performance control process code is updated and various settings are made according to the display result of the variable display. For example, if the display result of the variable display is a "big hit", the performance control process code can be updated to 07 [H], if the display result of the variable display is a "small hit", the performance control process code can be updated to 04 [H], and if the display result of the variable display is a "miss", the performance control process code can be updated to 00 [H].

The small hit display process, small hit opening process, and small hit end presentation process are processes for controlling the progress of presentations corresponding to the small hit game state. The big hit display process, round process, post-round process, and big hit end presentation process are processes for controlling the progress of presentations corresponding to the big hit game state.

(Variations of the basic explanation, etc.)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operation in the basic description and other descriptions, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the embodiment, and may have a part of the configuration described in the embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. When a subordinate concept is described in the embodiment, an invention of a superordinate concept using a homologous or similar matter, or an invention of a superordinate concept using a common property, is included as the present invention, and may have a part of the structure or characteristics described in the embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, or it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

The display during the variable display of the special pattern may be only one type of pattern, such as a symbol indicating "-", and the variable display may be such that this pattern is repeatedly displayed and turned off. One type of pattern may be displayed during the variable display, and this pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, the display result may be a non-display state in which the symbol indicating "-" is not displayed, and no special pattern is displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to change the probability of winning a jackpot or the ball payout rate in response to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot or the ball payout rate may be changed by using a different jackpot determination value for each set value. As a specific example, the set value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, if 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. The probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. During execution of the variable display, a setting suggestion performance that suggests the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate may be executed. The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. The setting suggestion performance may suggest the probability of a jackpot through any performance, and may also be able to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any gaming value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

The invention relating to gaming machines is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but can also be applied to slot machines as appropriate. A slot machine can execute a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of an operating lever, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of a stop button and a specific combination of stopped symbols is formed. In a slot machine, advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include one or more of the so-called bonuses, such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

The programs and data for implementing various controls, including the progress of the game and the execution of the performance, may be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, or may be distributed and provided by being installed in advance in a storage device of the computer device. In addition, the machine may be provided with a communication processing unit that can be connected to an external device on a network via a communication line, etc., and may distribute and provide the programs and data by downloading them from the external device. The execution form of the game and performance may also be executable by mounting a removable recording medium, or may be executable by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via a communication line, etc. in an internal memory, or may be executable directly using the hardware resources of an external device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., or may be executable by exchanging data with another computer device, etc., via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as the decision percentage of a process or data, or the execution percentage of a performance, expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" may include the case where one is a percentage of "0%" or "100%". For example, for one decision result or execution content, it may include the case where there is no decision or execution at a percentage of "0%", or the case where there is always a decision or execution at a percentage of "100%".

(Explanation of characteristic part 002AK)
FIG. 10-1 shows a configuration example AKP0 of a screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the characteristic part 002AK. In the configuration example AKP0, an active display area AKA0, a reserved display area AKB0, and a small pattern display area AKC0 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The active display area AKA0 enables active display by displaying a performance image in response to a variable display being executed. The reserved display area AKB0 enables reserved display by displaying a performance image in response to a variable display whose execution is pending. In this way, the active display area AKA0 and the reserved display area AKB0 enable active display and reserved display that are corresponding displays or specific displays corresponding to the variable display as displays related to the variable display. The reserved display area AKB0 may include a first reserved display area capable of executing a first reserved display by displaying a performance image that makes the first reserved memory number recognizable, and a second reserved display area capable of executing a second reserved display by displaying a performance image that makes the second reserved memory number recognizable.

In the active display area AKA0, an active display based on the reserved display erased (consumed) in the reserved display area AKB0 corresponding to the start of the special game is started. The reserved display area AKB0 can display reserved items corresponding to the reserved numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end, and the display area can be configured so that the reserved display is performed left-justified. The active display that can be displayed in the active display area AKA0 can be a reserved display in the reserved display area AKB0, and the shape, pattern, color, or combination of all or part of these that each display shows can be common to the reserved display in the reserved display area AKB0. For example, the active display may be a display image that is common to the reserved display and can be displayed larger than each reserved display. The display mode of the active display may be changed to a display mode different from that of the reserved display by executing an active display change performance. The active display area AKA0 may be able to distinguish the active display from the reserved display by, for example, displaying a performance image showing a pedestal below the active display.

The small symbol display area AKC0 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and is provided in a specified position, for example, the lower right part on the screen of the image display device 5. In the small symbol display area AKC0, variable display of small symbols is executed in response to variable display of special symbols and performance symbols. The performance image showing the small symbol is reduced in size compared to the identification information image which is the performance image showing the performance symbol, and may be a reduced identification information image capable of variable display in a display mode which is common in whole or in part to each of the identification information images showing the performance symbols. The performance image showing the small symbol may be displayed in a position which is always visible.

Figure 10-2 shows an example of the configuration of a start-gate winning command included in the performance control command for the feature part 002AK. The start-gate switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108 included in the special pattern process process P_TPROC shown in Figure 6 enables the main board 11 to transmit a performance control command that specifies the occurrence of a start winning to the performance control board 12 based on the game ball passing through a starting area such as the first start winning port or the second start winning port. The start-gate switch passing process P_TZU_ON also enables the main board 11 to transmit a performance control command that specifies the number of reserved memories to the performance control board 12. Furthermore, the start-gate switch passing process P_TZU_ON executes a winning performance process using the extracted game random number, thereby enabling the main board 11 to transmit a performance control command that specifies the winning judgment result to the performance control board 12. A start-gate winning designation command is prepared in advance as a performance control command that specifies the occurrence of a start winning. A reserved memory information designation command is provided in advance as a performance control command that specifies the number of reserved memories. A prize-winning judgment result command is provided in advance as a performance control command that specifies the judgment result when a prize is won.

Figure 10-2 (A) shows an example of the settings of the start port winning designation command, the reserved memory information designation command, and the winning judgment result command. The start port winning designation command includes the command B100 [H] which is the first start port winning designation command, and the command B200 [H] which is the second start port winning designation command. The reserved memory information designation command includes the command C1XX [H] which is the first reserved memory information designation command, and the command C2XX [H] which is the second reserved memory information designation command. Note that XX [H] indicates 1 byte data which is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. The reserved memory information designation command may be set to different EXT data, for example, any of 00 [H] to 04 [H], depending on the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. The winning judgment result command is a command C4XX[H] that can set different EXT data depending on the judgment result of the winning performance process executed using the gaming random number.

In the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11, the CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON of steps S104 and S108 shown in FIG. 6 controls to transmit multiple types of presentation control commands as start winning commands based on the game ball passing through the starting area. The start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON of steps S104 and S108 stores the extracted game random number as reserved information in the first special pattern reserved buffer and the second special pattern reserved buffer, and makes it possible to execute the winning presentation process using these game random numbers. The winning presentation process makes it possible to determine, for example, using the random number MR1-1 for special pattern determination, whether or not the display result of the special pattern is controlled to a jackpot game state in response to a "jackpot" before the variable display is executed. The CPU 103 that executes the winning performance process executes a comparison calculation with the jackpot determination value to determine whether the value of the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, if the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol is within the jackpot determination range, the winning performance determination result is set to "jackpot." The CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON that includes this kind of winning performance process becomes a determination means that can determine whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed.

In addition, when the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol is not within the jackpot determination range, the CPU 103 that executes the winning performance process performs a comparison calculation with the reach determination determination value for the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing performance to determine whether or not its value is within the reach determination range. At this time, if the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing performance is within the reach determination range, a comparison calculation is further performed with the super reach determination determination value using the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type to determine whether or not its value is within the super reach determination range. In this way, in response to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type being within the super reach determination range, the winning time determination result is set to "super reach determination on loss". In response to the random number MR3-3 for selecting a variation pattern type being not within the super reach determination range and the random number MR3-2 for selecting a losing performance being within the reach determination range, the winning time determination result is set to "reach determination on loss". In response to the fact that the random number MR3-2 used to select the losing effect is not within the range of the determined reach, the winning judgment result is set to "general losing effect."

Figure 10-2 (B) shows an example of the contents specified by the winning time judgment result command. Among the winning time judgment result commands, command C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be sent when the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol is not within the jackpot judgment range, and notify the winning time judgment result that the display result of the special symbol game will be determined to be "miss" and the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, command C401H is sent when the random number MR1-1 for determining the special symbol is within the jackpot judgment range, and notifies the winning time judgment result that the display result of the special symbol game will be determined to be "jackpot" and the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state. Note that command C400H notifies that the winning time judgment is restricted.

Figure 10-3 shows an example of the configuration of a variation pattern related to the feature part 002AK. It is sufficient that multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to different special chart variation times and variable display modes of the performance patterns. The multiple variation patterns related to the feature part 002AK include variation patterns corresponding to any of "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", and "reach (hit)". "Non-reach (miss)" is a case where the variable display of the performance patterns does not reach a reach state, the fixed performance pattern of a non-reach combination is stopped as a display result, and the variable display result of the performance patterns is "non-reach miss". "Reach (miss)" is a case where, after the variable display of the performance patterns reaches a reach state, the fixed performance pattern of a reach combination that is not a jackpot combination is stopped and the variable display result of the performance patterns is "reach miss". A "reach (hit)" occurs when the variable display of the performance symbols reaches a reach state, and then the confirmed performance symbols for the big win combination (or small win combination) are displayed stationary, causing the variable display of the performance symbols to result in a "big win" (or a "small win").

The fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "non-reach miss" is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "reach miss" is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "big hit" or "small hit" is a hit fluctuation pattern. Non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns are collectively called miss fluctuation patterns. Reach fluctuation patterns and hit fluctuation patterns include a "normal" fluctuation pattern in which the display result at the time of the variable display is frozen after a reach performance that becomes a normal reach is executed, and a "super" fluctuation pattern in which the display result of the variable display is frozen after a reach performance that becomes a normal reach is executed, and then develops into a reach performance that becomes a super reach, and after the reach performance that becomes a super reach is executed, the display result of the variable display is frozen. Reach performances that become super reaches include Super A and Super B reach performances, which have different presentation styles from each other.

Figure 10-4 shows an example of the configuration of a fluctuation pattern determination table. The fluctuation pattern determination table includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table AKT01 shown in Figure 10-4 (A), a normal time miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT02 shown in Figure 10-4 (B1), and a time-saving miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03 shown in Figure 10-4 (B2). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table AKT01 is used when the display result of the special pattern is a "jackpot". The normal time miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT02 is used when the display result of the special pattern is a "miss" in a normal state where time-saving control is not performed. The time-saving miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03 is used when the display result of the special pattern is a "miss" in a time-saving state where time-saving control is performed. The normal time miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT02 and the time-saving miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03 are included in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the display result of the special pattern is a "miss."

The special pattern process P_TPROC shown in FIG. 6 enables the execution of a variation pattern setting process after the special pattern determination process when the special pattern normal process P_TNORMAL corresponding to the special pattern process code 00 [H] is executed in step S112 and variable display of the special pattern is started. The variation pattern setting process enables the variation pattern to be determined using the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern. Note that the variation pattern setting process can use the random number MR3-2 for selecting a miss effect and the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type to determine the variation pattern. However, to simplify the explanation, it is assumed here that the variation pattern is determined using the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern.

When determining the fluctuation pattern, numerical data indicating the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern is read from the fluctuation pattern buffer. The fluctuation pattern buffer can store numerical data indicating the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern contained in the game random number extracted when the first start winning or the second start winning occurs. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 compares the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern read from the fluctuation pattern buffer with a determination value that is preset in the selected fluctuation pattern determination table. Then, the fluctuation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result of which range of determination values assigned to each fluctuation pattern contains the random number MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table AKT01, a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the number of determination values assigned to the "super" fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PA3-2 and PA3-3 is greater than the number of determination values assigned to the "normal" fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PA3-1. In contrast, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination tables AKT02 and AKT03, a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the number of determination values assigned to the "normal" fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is greater than the number of determination values assigned to the "super" fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PA2-2 and PA2-3. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped after the reach performance that becomes the super reach is executed, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) is higher than when the display result of the variable display is stopped without executing the reach performance that becomes the super reach even if the reach performance that becomes the normal reach is executed.

In the normal time miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT02, a fluctuation pattern in which the number of assigned decision values differs depending on which value the first reserved memory number is, among 0, 1, or 2 or more, may be set. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special pattern fluctuation time) of the special pattern and the performance pattern can be made different depending on the first reserved memory number. When the first reserved memory number is a predetermined value (for example, "2") or more, a determination value may be assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the average variable display time can be shorter than when the first reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. In the time-saving miss fluctuation pattern determination table AKT03, a fluctuation pattern in which the number of assigned decision values differs depending on which value the second reserved memory number is, among 0, 1, or 2 or more, may be set. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special pattern fluctuation time) of the special pattern and the performance pattern can be made different depending on the second reserved memory number. When the second reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (e.g., "2"), a determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the average variable display time can be made shorter than when the second reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. In addition, in the time-saving miss variation pattern determination table AKT03, a determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern so that a greater number of determination values are assigned to a variation pattern with a shorter special chart variation time than a variation pattern with a longer special chart variation time than in the normal time miss variation pattern determination table AKT02. This allows the average variable display time of special symbols and performance symbols to be shortened during time-saving control compared to normal time when time-saving control is not performed.

The preview performance that the pachinko game machine 1 can execute includes a character movement performance. The character movement performance includes a moving state display in which the display position of a performance image showing a character displayed in response to the occurrence of a start winning can move toward a preset arrival display position. The moving state display displays a performance image showing a character selected from a plurality of types of characters prepared in advance, thereby enabling the execution of a character movement performance in one of a plurality of performance modes. The character movement performance may be executed in different performance modes depending on the type of character, size, shape, pattern, color, type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of any performance image. In addition, the character movement performance may be executed in different performance modes using any performance device, such as the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or a part of these, along with the display of a performance image showing a character on the image display device 5.

The character movement effect can be included in the special effect. The special effect is an effect that can be started before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, for example, when it is possible to judge, using a game random number extracted when a start winning occurs, whether or not the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed. The special effect can be executed in different performance modes, such as the display mode of an arbitrary performance image. In addition, the special effect can be executed in different performance modes using an arbitrary performance device, such as the display of a performance image on the image display device 5, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

The execution pattern of the character movement effect may include a first pattern in which the performance mode of the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, and a second pattern in which the performance mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. The first pattern may be a single pattern prepared in advance, or multiple patterns may be prepared in advance. The second pattern may be a single pattern prepared in advance, or multiple patterns may be prepared in advance. The timing at which the variable display that is the subject of the judgment is executed can be included in the specific timing. In this case, the execution pattern of the character movement effect may include a first pattern in which the performance mode of the character movement effect is inherited after the specific timing, and a second pattern in which the performance mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the specific timing.

A switching suggestion effect or a character hiding effect may be executed while a character movement effect is being executed. A switching suggestion effect is included in a suggestion effect that suggests that a switch to the first pattern may occur when a character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern. A character hiding effect is included in a special effect that makes the character movement effect invisible. In this way, when a character movement effect that can start to be executed before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment is being executed in the second pattern, a suggestion effect that suggests that a switch to the first pattern may occur can be executed. Also, a character hiding effect can be executed that makes a character movement effect that can start to be executed before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment invisible.

Figure 10-5 shows multiple example display images applicable to character movement effects, switching suggestion effects, and character hiding effects. These example display images include, as multiple effect images applicable when executing a character movement effect, a display image showing four characters CH01 to CH04, and a display image showing characters CH11 to CH14, which have a different display mode from characters CH01 to CH04. The example display images also include a display image that forms an effect display CJ01 as an effect image applicable when executing a switching suggestion effect, and a display image that forms a concealment display CK01 as an effect image applicable when executing a character hiding effect.

The display images of characters CH01 to CH04 shown in Fig. 10-5 (A1) to (D1) are applicable when executing a character movement effect in a non-inheritance effect pattern in which the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that was the subject of the judgment. That is, Fig. 10-5 (A1) shows an example of an effect image display of character CH01, which is a character "A" included in multiple characters, corresponding to a non-inheritance effect pattern. Fig. 10-5 (B1) shows an example of an effect image display of character CH02, which is a character "B" included in multiple characters, corresponding to a non-inheritance effect pattern. Fig. 10-5 (C1) shows an example of an effect image display of character CH03, which is a character "C" included in multiple characters, corresponding to a non-inheritance effect pattern. Fig. 10-5 (D1) shows an example of an effect image display of character CH04, which is a character "D" included in multiple characters, corresponding to a non-inheritance effect pattern.

The display images of characters CH11 to CH14 shown in Fig. 10-5 (A2) to (D2) are applicable when executing a character movement effect in a performance pattern with inheritance in which the performance mode of the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that was the subject of the judgment. That is, Fig. 10-5 (A2) shows an example of a performance image display of character CH11, which becomes character "A" included in multiple characters, corresponding to the performance pattern with inheritance. Fig. 10-5 (B2) shows an example of a performance image display of character CH12, which becomes character "B" included in multiple characters, corresponding to the performance pattern with inheritance. Fig. 10-5 (C2) shows an example of a performance image display of character CH13, which becomes character "C" included in multiple characters, corresponding to the performance pattern with inheritance. Fig. 10-5 (D2) shows an example of a performance image display of character CH14, which becomes character "D" included in multiple characters, corresponding to the performance pattern with inheritance.

Character CH01 shown in FIG. 10-5 (A1) and character CH11 shown in FIG. 10-5 (A2) are common in that they are character "A" included in a plurality of characters, but may differ in display mode, for example, by at least a part of the shape, pattern, and color shown in the production image. Character CH02 shown in FIG. 10-5 (B1) and character CH12 shown in FIG. 10-5 (B2) are common in that they are character "B" included in a plurality of characters, but may differ in display mode, for example, by at least a part of the shape, pattern, and color shown in the production image. Character CH03 shown in FIG. 10-5 (C1) and character CH13 shown in FIG. 10-5 (C2) are common in that they are character "C" included in a plurality of characters, but may differ in display mode, for example, by at least a part of the shape, pattern, and color shown in the production image. Character CH04 shown in FIG. 10-5 (D1) and character CH14 shown in FIG. 10-5 (D2) are common in that they are both character "D" included in a plurality of characters, but the display mode may differ, for example, by at least a portion of the shape, pattern, and color shown in the effect image. In this way, the display mode may be different between the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance and the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern when there is inheritance, by having some of the shapes, patterns, and colors shown in the respective effect images in common, but other portions being different. The display mode may be different between the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance and the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern when there is inheritance, by having all of the shapes, patterns, and colors shown in the respective effect images being different.

Figure 10-5 (E) shows a display image capable of forming the effect display CJ01 in the switching suggestion effect. After the switching suggestion effect is executed, there may be a case where the effect pattern of the character movement effect is switched from the effect pattern without inheritance to the effect pattern with inheritance, and a case where the effect pattern of the character movement effect is not switched from the effect pattern without inheritance to the effect pattern with inheritance. An effect in which the effect pattern of the character movement effect is switched from the effect pattern without inheritance to the effect pattern with inheritance is also called a switching success effect. An effect in which the effect pattern of the character movement effect is not switched from the effect pattern without inheritance to the effect pattern with inheritance is also called a switching failure effect. Whether a switching success effect is executed or a switching failure effect is executed, it is sufficient that a switching suggestion effect can be executed by a display image that forms the effect display CJ01. As another example of a switching suggestion effect, an effect image showing a switching suggestion character may be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and an action effect that acts on any of the characters CH01 to CH04 displayed as a suggested target may be executed. The action effect included in such a switching suggestion effect may be a display effect that suggests that the effect pattern will be switched at a predetermined rate by acting on any of the displayed characters CH01 to CH04. In addition to such display effects, the action effect may be executed using any effect device, such as sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members including movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

In this way, the switching suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined rate even if the first pattern can be switched to or cannot be switched to after the character movement effect has started to be executed in the effect pattern without inheritance, which is the second pattern. However, the switching suggestion effect may always be executed when the first pattern can be switched to after the character movement effect has started to be executed in the effect pattern without inheritance, which is the second pattern. In contrast, the switching suggestion effect may or may not be executed at a predetermined rate even if the first pattern cannot be switched to after the character movement effect has started to be executed in the effect pattern without inheritance, which is the second pattern.

Figure 10-5 (F) shows a display image capable of forming the hidden display CK01 in the character hiding performance. After the character hiding performance is executed, at the shift timing corresponding to the start of a new variable display, there may be a case of continued hiding in which the character hiding performance continues, a case of restarting display in which the display in the character moving performance is restarted, and a case of ending display in which the display in the character moving performance ends with the end of the character hiding performance. The ratio of continued hiding, restarting display, and ending display may differ between the case where the performance pattern of the character moving performance is a performance pattern without inheritance and the case where the performance pattern is a performance pattern with inheritance. In any case of continued hiding, restarting display, and ending display, it is sufficient that the character hiding performance can be executed by the display image that forms the hidden display CK01. As another example of the character hiding performance, a movable member hiding performance may be executed in which the display of the character in the character moving performance becomes invisible or difficult to see by moving a movable member such as the movable body 32 to the front side of the display screen of the image display device 5. Along with this character concealment effect, it may be possible to perform a concealment notification effect using any desired effect device, such as sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, movement of movable members including movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

The preview effects that the pachinko game machine 1 can execute may include a reserved display preview and an active display preview. The reserved display preview, as an example of a look-ahead preview effect, changes at least one of the reserved displays in the reserved display area AKB0 to a display mode different from the display mode during normal times, thereby predicting that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved display will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. The reserved display preview changes the display color of the reserved display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started to a specific color different from the specified color during normal times, making it possible to recognize the change in the display mode of the reserved display, and suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate. The specified color of the reserved display during normal times may be, for example, white. The specified color of the reserved display during normal times that is different from the specified color may include, for example, blue, green, red, etc. In addition, by changing the display pattern in the reserved display to a specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern in normal times, it may be possible to suggest that the expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" is higher than normal. The predetermined pattern in the reserved display in normal times may be, for example, a solid color. The specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern in the reserved display in normal times may include, for example, a cherry blossom pattern. By using a display mode that shows a predetermined message as the reserved display, it may be possible to suggest that the expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" is increased. The display mode that shows a predetermined message as the reserved display may be capable of announcing messages such as "chance," "hot," and "super hot." The change in the reserved display in the reserved display notice is also called a "reserved display change." The performance that changes the reserved display due to the reserved display notice is also called a "reserved display change performance." The reserved display change performance can be included in the change performance.

The active display notice changes the active display in the active display area AKA0 to a display mode different from the display mode during normal times, thereby notifying the player that the start condition is met and the display result of the variable display of the special pattern being executed will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate, and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. As with the pending display notice, the display mode of the active display that is changed in response to the variable display being executed by the active display notice may be changed to a display color, a display pattern, the presence or absence of a message, or the content of a message, that is different from the normal state. The change in the active display in the active display notice is also called an "active display change". The performance that changes the active display by the active display notice is also called an "active display change performance". The active display change performance can be included in the change performance. The display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the pending display that can be changed by the pending display notice. The display mode of the pending display that can be changed by the pending display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice.

Figure 10-6 shows an example of a display of multiple effect images that can be applied to the pending display and active display. This example of the effect image display includes four display images AKE0 to AKE3 as multiple effect images that can be applied to the pending display and active display, and three display images AKE11 to AKE13 as multiple effect images that have unique display modes that can be applied to the active display. The number of effect images that can be applied to the pending display and active display can be multiple images based on any design.

Figure 10-6 (A) shows a display image AKE0 using a performance image when a round, solid white display is performed. Figure 10-6 (B) shows a display image AKE1 using a performance image when a round, solid blue display is performed. Figure 10-6 (C) shows a display image AKE2 using a performance image when a round, solid green display is performed. Figure 10-6 (D) shows a display image AKE3 using a performance image when a round, solid red display is performed. The normal display mode in the reserved display and active display is a round, solid white display using the display image AKE0. Among the display images AKE0 to AKE3, when the display color of the reserved display and active display is red using the display image AKE3, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the other display images AKE0 to AKE2 are used. When the display color of the reserved display and active display is green using the display image AKE2, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the display color is red using the display image AKE3. When the display color of the pending display or active display is blue using display image AKE1, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the display color is green using display image AKE2. When the display color of the pending display or active display is white using display image AKE0 out of display images AKE0 to AKE3, it becomes the normal display color, and the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the other display images AKE1 to AKE3 are used. In this way, the pending display and active display may correspond to multiple types of display modes and have different expectations for being controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state.

Figure 10-6 (E) shows display image AKE11 using an effect image capable of announcing the message "?". Figure 10-6 (F) shows display image AKE12 using an effect image capable of announcing the message "Chance". Figure 10-6 (G) shows display image AKE13 using an effect image capable of announcing the message "Hot". Of display images AKE11 to AKE13, when the message "Hot" is announced by active display using display image AKE13, the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the other display images AKE11 and AKE12 are used. When the message "Chance" is announced by active display using display image AKE12, the probability of a jackpot is lower than when display image AKE13 is used. Among the display images AKE11 to AKE13, when a "?" message is displayed by active display using the display image AKE11, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the other display images AKE12 and AKE13 are used. In this way, the active display may have different expectations for controlling the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state in response to multiple unique display modes.

When the variable display of the performance symbols reaches a reach state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a reach effect including a post-reach effect as a special effect that indicates that the display result of the special symbol will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The post-reach effect included in the reach effect includes a background display effect, a step-up effect, and a story effect, and any of these effects can be selectively executed.

In the background display effect, for example, a presentation image of a character announcing a message is displayed as a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. The background display effect only needs to be capable of indicating that the display result of the special pattern becomes a "jackpot" at different rates and that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state depending on whether or not it is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state, and also depending on the presentation mode when it is executed. The background display effect only needs to be capable of being executed in different presentation modes depending on the content of the message by the character, the type of character, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of frame that forms the outer frame, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of any presentation image. Presentations by any display different from the background display effect only need to be capable of being executed in different presentation modes depending on the display mode of any presentation image, as appropriate.

In the step-up effect, for example, in a display area of the effect image surrounded by a rectangular outer frame of a predetermined display color, the display content of the effect image is changed in a predetermined order, and the effect state changes in multiple stages to become a step-up effect. The step-up effect can be performed in different proportions depending on whether or not it is performed after the variable display has reached a reach state, and also depending on the effect state including the number of steps when it is performed, indicating that the display result of the special pattern becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The step-up effect can be performed in different effect states using any effect device, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

In the story presentation, for example, presentation images that can change continuously over time according to a series of stories are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as reach presentation images. The story presentation only needs to be capable of suggesting that the display result of the special pattern becomes a "jackpot" at different rates and that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state depending on whether or not it is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state, and depending on the presentation mode when it is executed. The story presentation may be included in a full-screen presentation that covers the entire screen by displaying presentation images over the entire display screen of the image display device 5. The story presentation may be executed by playing and displaying moving images, or by displaying animated still images.

Figure 10-7 shows an example of a display of multiple effect images that can be applied to background display effects. This example of the effect image display includes three display images AKF1 to AKF3 as multiple effect images that can be applied to background display effects. The number of effect images that can be applied to background display effects can be multiple images based on any design.

Fig. 10-7(A) shows a display image AKF1 using an effect image including a text image announcing the message "???". Fig. 10-7(B) shows a display image AKF2 using an effect image including a text image announcing the message "Chance!!". Fig. 10-7(C) shows a display image AKF3 using an effect image including a text image announcing the message "Hot!!". When the background display effect is executed using the display image AKF3 among the display images AKF1 to AKF3, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the other display images AKF1 and AKF2 are used. When the background display effect is executed using the display image AKF2, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the display image AKF3 is used. When the background display effect is executed using the display image AKF1 among the display images AKF1 to AKF3, the expectation of a jackpot is lower than when the other display images AKF2 and AKF3 are used.

Figure 10-8 shows an example of a changeable effect image display when a step-up effect is executed. This effect image display example shows a case where four display images AKG1 to AKG4 are included as effect images that are changeably displayed in the step-up effect. The number of effect images that are changeably displayed in the step-up effect may be multiple images based on any design. In addition, after a single effect image is displayed in the step-up effect, there may be a case where the execution of the step-up effect ends without changing the display.

Figure 10-8 (A) shows a display image AKG1 using a first step presentation image corresponding to step number "1" when the change in presentation mode in the step-up presentation is at the first stage. Figure 10-8 (B) shows a display image AKG2 using a second step presentation image corresponding to step number "2" when the change in presentation mode in the step-up presentation is at the second stage. Figure 10-8 (C) shows a display image AKG3 using a third step presentation image corresponding to step number "3" when the change in presentation mode in the step-up presentation is at the third stage. Figure 10-8 (D) shows a display image AKG4 using a fourth step presentation image corresponding to step number "4" when the change in presentation mode in the step-up presentation is at the fourth stage.

When a step-up performance is executed, the maximum number of steps may be determined to be any one of "1" to "4". The maximum number of steps indicates the number of stages to which the performance state can change from the start to the end of the step-up performance. The display image AKG1 corresponds to the step number "1" of the first stage in the step-up performance, and includes an outer frame partial image with a blue display color and an inner frame partial image of the first step. The display image AKG2 corresponds to the step number "2" of the second stage in the step-up performance, and can be displayed after the display image AKG1 is displayed, and includes an outer frame partial image with a green display color and an inner frame partial image of the second step. The display image AKG3 corresponds to the step number "3" of the third stage in the step-up performance, and can be displayed after the display image AKG2 is displayed, and includes an outer frame image portion with a red display color and an inner frame partial image of the third step. Display image AKG4 corresponds to the step number "4" of the fourth stage in the step-up performance, and can be displayed after display image AKG3 is displayed, and includes an outer frame image portion that is displayed in gold color, and an image of the fourth step inside the frame portion.

Figure 10-9 shows an example of a display image that can change when a story presentation is executed. The content of the progression of a series of stories in a story presentation may be different in response to a plurality of story presentation patterns. In this way, it is sufficient that the story presentation can be executed in different presentation modes in response to a plurality of story presentation patterns. In the presentation image display example shown in Figure 10-9, a presentation image that first displays the display image AKH11 is used regardless of the plurality of story presentation patterns. After that, the story presentation can be executed in a plurality of presentation modes, including a case where a presentation image that displays the display image AKH21 is used in response to a plurality of story presentation patterns, and a case where a presentation image that displays the display image AKH22 is used in response to a plurality of story presentation patterns. After the display image AKH21 is displayed, the story presentation can be executed in a plurality of presentation modes, including a case where a presentation image that displays the display image AKH31 is used in response to a plurality of story presentation patterns, a case where a presentation image that displays the display image AKH32 is used, and a case where a presentation image that displays the display image AKH33 is used in response to a plurality of story presentation patterns. After the display image AKH22 is displayed, the story presentation can be executed in a plurality of presentation modes, including a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH32 is used and a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH33 is used, corresponding to a plurality of story presentation patterns. After the display image AKH31 is displayed, the story presentation can be executed in a plurality of presentation modes, including a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH41 is used, a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH42 is used, a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH43 is used, and a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH44 is used, corresponding to a plurality of story presentation patterns. After the display image AKH32 is displayed, the story presentation can be executed in a plurality of presentation modes, including a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH42 is used, a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH43 is used, and a case where a presentation image displaying the display image AKH44 is used, corresponding to a plurality of story presentation patterns. After display image AKH33 is displayed, the story presentation can be performed in a number of different presentation modes, including a case where a presentation image that displays display image AKH43 is used, and a case where a presentation image that displays display image AKH44 is used, corresponding to a number of story presentation patterns.

When a story presentation is executed using display image AHK44 out of display images AKH41 to AKH44, the probability of a jackpot is higher than when other display images AKH41 to AHK43 are used. When a story presentation is executed using display image AKH43, the probability of a jackpot is lower than when display image AKH44 is used. When a story presentation is executed using display image AKH42, the probability of a jackpot is lower than when display image AKH43 is used. When a story presentation is executed using display image AKH41 out of display images AKH41 to AKH44, the probability of a jackpot is lower than when other display images AKH42 to AKH44 are used.

These post-reach effects may be executed in a specific period included in the reach effect as a special effect. The specific period may be, for example, the period from the timing of reach establishment, when the display mode of the variable display of the effect pattern becomes a reach mode, and the variable display becomes a reach state, to the timing of development into a reach effect that becomes a super reach. Alternatively, the specific period may be the period from the timing of reach establishment to the timing when the fixed effect pattern that becomes the final stop pattern is stopped and the variable display ends. In addition, the specific period may be any period set corresponding to the variable display becoming a reach state. The effect pattern is made transparent and displayable according to the transparent pattern from the start to the end of such a specific period. When the effect pattern is displayed transparently, the effect pattern may be displayed with different transparency rates corresponding to multiple pattern transparent patterns. Also, when the effect pattern is displayed transparently, the transparency rate of the effect pattern may be changed in different change modes corresponding to multiple pattern transparent patterns.

The advance notice effects that the pachinko game machine 1 can execute may include timer effects and timer standby effects. The timer effects can be executed in response to the start of the variable display, and may be able to recognizably notify the remaining time from when the execution of the effect starts to when it ends. The remaining time that can be notified by the timer effect may indicate the timing when another effect is executed, or may indicate the timing when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the remaining time that can be notified by the timer effect may indicate the remaining time when the timer effect itself can be executed, regardless of other effects or variable display. Other effects that can indicate the execution timing by the timer effect may include a jackpot expectation notification effect or a setting value suggestion effect included in the reach effect, or may include any advance notice effect different from the reach effect. A timer standby effect that recognizably indicates that the execution of the timer effect is waiting before the execution of the timer effect starts can be executed. The timing when the execution of the timer effect starts can be included in the specific timing.

The timer effect is an effect that can be executed in the variable display that is the subject of the judgment when it is possible to judge, for example, using a game random number extracted when a start winning occurs, before the variable display is executed, whether or not it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state based on the variable display. The timer standby effect is an example of a look-ahead notice effect that can be started before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment when the timer effect is executed. The timer effect and the timer standby effect may be executed in one of a plurality of types of performance modes based on the occurrence of a start winning, and may be capable of foretelling that the display result in the variable display of the special pattern will be a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and that it will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The performance modes of the timer standby effect include, for example, a continuation performance mode in which the performance mode does not change from the start to the end of the performance execution, and a change performance mode in which the performance mode changes from the start to the end of the performance execution. The timer standby effect executed in the change performance mode can be included in the change performance that changes the display mode of the specific display.

Figure 10-10 shows an example of a display of multiple effect images that can be applied to timer wait effects and timer effects. This effect image display example includes five display images AKJ0-AKJ2, AKJ11, and AKJ12 as multiple effect images that can be applied to timer wait effects, and four display images AKJ21-AKJ24 as multiple effect images that can be applied to timer effects. The number of effect images that can be applied to timer wait effects and timer effects can be multiple images based on any design.

Figure 10-10 (A) shows a display image AKJ0 using a performance image in which a specific character includes a text image announcing the message "Not yet..." as a specific display in a timer standby performance. When performance execution is started, the timer standby performance suggests that the execution of the timer performance is waiting in response to the variable display based on the start winning by displaying the display image AKJ0 on the screen of the image display device 5 as a specific display. A timer standby performance executed in a performance mode in which this specific display does not change becomes a timer standby performance in a continuous performance mode, and a timer standby performance executed in a performance mode in which the specific display changes becomes a timer standby performance in a changing performance mode. In this embodiment, a performance image showing a specific character including a text image announcing a message can be displayed as a specific display, and both the timer performance and the timer standby performance include performances using specific displays.

Figure 10-10 (B1) shows a display image AKJ1 using a performance image in which a specific character includes a text image announcing the message "plus 5 seconds" in response to a case where the timer standby performance is executed in a change performance mode. Figure 10-10 (C1) shows a display image AKJ2 using a performance image in which a specific character includes a text image announcing the message "plus 15 seconds" in response to a case where the timer standby performance is executed in a change performance mode. When the timer standby performance is executed in a change performance mode, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 only needs to be able to change to either the first change display using the display image AKJ1 or the second change display using the display image AKJ2. The timer standby performance in the change performance mode can be executed as a change performance that changes the display mode of the specific display by changing the specific display using the display image AKJ0 to the first change display using the display image AKJ1 or the second change display using the display image AKJ2 before the variable display in which the timer performance starts to be executed. The change effect is not limited to changing the display image AKJ0 to either the display image AKJ1 or AKJ2, but may be any effect that can change to any desired state before the variable display that is the subject of the determination.

Figure 10-10 (B2) shows a display image AKJ11 using a performance image that can be displayed separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0, corresponding to the case where the timer standby performance is executed in the continuation performance mode. Figure 10-10 (C2) shows a display image AKJ12 using a performance image that can be displayed separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0, corresponding to the case where the timer standby performance is executed in the continuation performance mode. When the timer standby performance is executed in the continuation performance mode, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change to the first change display using the display image AKJ1 or the second change display using the display image AKJ2. On the other hand, when the timer standby performance is executed in the continuation performance mode, a pre-stage performance can be executed at a predetermined rate by displaying the display image AKJ11 or the display image AKJ12, separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0. The pre-stage performance may be executed at a predetermined rate without changing the specific display using the display image AKJ0 when a change performance is not executed because a timer standby performance in a continuation performance mode is executed before the variable display that starts executing the timer performance. The pre-stage performance is not limited to using either the display image AKJ11 or AKJ12, and may be executed in any performance mode that is different from the change in the specific display in response to the case where a change performance is not executed before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment.

Figure 10-10 (D) shows a display image AKJ21 using a performance image in which a specific character includes a text image announcing the message "5 seconds left" as a specific display in a timer performance. Figure 10-10 (E) shows a display image AKJ22 using a performance image in which a specific character includes a text image announcing the message "10 seconds left" as a specific display in a timer performance. Figure 10-10 (F) shows a display image AKJ23 using a performance image in which a specific character includes a text image announcing the message "15 seconds left" as a specific display in a timer performance. Figure 10-10 (G) shows a display image AKJ24 using a performance image in which a specific character includes a text image announcing the message "20 seconds left" as a specific display in a timer performance. When the execution of the timer performance is started, it is sufficient that the remaining time until the execution of the performance is completed can be notified by executing a performance by a specific display that displays one of the display images AKJ21 to AKJ24. After a specific display using display images AKJ21 to AKJ24, a countdown display of the remaining time may be performed. The specific display is not limited to character movement displays, but may include pending display notices, active displays, timer standby displays, timer displays, and any other displays that can be executed as pre-reading preview displays. The specific display is not limited to the display of a specific character using display image AKJ0, etc., but may include pending displays, active displays, and any other displays that can be displayed in pre-reading preview displays or preview displays other than pre-reading preview displays.

Figure 10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the look-ahead performance setting process. The look-ahead performance setting process is included in the process that can be called from the performance control process S_CPROC shown in Figure 9 (A), and can be executed in step S151 each time the performance control process S_CPROC is executed. When the look-ahead performance setting process is executed, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command that becomes a start port winning command has been received (step AKS001). In step AKS001, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a performance control command has been received at the time of start winning by checking whether or not a start port winning designation command, a reserved memory information designation command, or a winning time judgment result command has been newly stored in the first start winning time command buffer or the second start winning time command buffer.

When a start-port winning command is received (step AKS001; Yes), the specified content by the received command is identified (step AKS002). For example, the winning-port winning judgment result is identified as the specified content by the winning-port winning judgment result command. Next, it is determined whether or not there is a judgment limit (step AKS003). In step AKS003, when a predetermined limiting condition for the winning-port winning judgment is met, it is determined that there is a judgment limit. The limiting condition for the winning-port winning judgment is met, for example, when the specified content by the winning-port winning judgment result command is during the winning-port winning judgment limit. In addition, the limiting condition for the winning-port winning judgment may be met, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "0". In a configuration in which the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game, during the time-saving control in which the second special game is likely to be executed, the limiting condition for the winning-port winning judgment may be met when a start-port winning command based on the occurrence of the first start winning is received. Within the scope of such a limiting condition for winning judgment, if it is possible to determine whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display before the variable display begins, a limit can be set so that the effect that becomes the pre-reading preview effect is not executed before the variable display that is the subject of that judgment.

If there is no judgment restriction corresponding to step AKS003 (step AKS003; No), it is sufficient that the character movement effect determination process (step AKS004) and the timer effect determination process (step AKS005) can be executed sequentially. The character movement effect determination process of step AKS004 is a process that enables a decision regarding the start of execution of a character movement effect, such as whether or not to execute a character movement effect and the effect pattern if a character movement effect is executed. The timer effect determination process of step AKS005 is a process that enables a decision regarding the start of execution of a timer effect, such as whether or not to execute a timer effect and the effect pattern if a timer effect is executed.

In the case where there is a judgment restriction corresponding to step AKS003 (step AKS003; Yes), after executing the timer performance determination process of step AKS005, the reserved display image is determined (step AKS006). The reserved display image is a performance image used for the reserved display. After that, the reserved display update setting at the start of winning is performed (step AKS007). In step AKS007, a new reserved display is added so that the reserved display in the reserved display area AKB0 is increased by 1. In step AKS007, the reserved display image determined in step AKS006 may be displayed to start a new reserved display. Alternatively, in step AKS007, regardless of the determination result in step AKS006, the display image AKE0 may be displayed first, so that the display color, which is the display mode during normal times, is a white circular display. After that, at the shift timing when the reserved display is shifted due to the consumption of the reserved memory, the display may be changed to the reserved display image determined in step AKS006.

If no command is received at the start gate entry in response to step AKS001 (step AKS001; No), or after step AKS007, it is determined whether it is time to shift the pending display in response to the start of a new variable display as the pending memory is consumed (step AKS008). If it is not time to shift (step AKS008; No), the pre-reading performance setting process ends.

When it is shift time corresponding to step AKS008 (step AKS008; Yes), it is sufficient that character movement effect execution processing (step AKS009) and timer effect execution processing (step ASK010) can be executed sequentially. The character movement effect execution processing of step AKS009 is processing that enables decisions and control regarding the execution of a character movement effect, such as whether or not to execute a switch suggestion effect, whether or not to execute a character hiding effect, and control during the execution of a character hiding effect, when a character movement effect is being executed. The timer effect execution processing of step AKS010 is processing that enables settings regarding the execution of a timer effect or a timer standby effect, such as settings for executing a timer effect or settings for executing a timer standby effect.

After the timer performance execution process of step AKS010, the pending display update setting is performed at the start of the change (step AKS011), and the look-ahead performance setting process ends. Step AKS011 reduces the pending display in the pending display area AKB0 by 1, erases the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" to consume the pending display, and shifts the pending display in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4" by moving them one by one. This shifts the pending display. At this time, a setting is made to update the active display in the active display area AKA0 in response to the erased pending display. Therefore, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start displaying the performance image that will be the active display in the active display area AKA0. The display of the performance image that will be the active display may be capable of inheriting the display mode of the performance image in the erased pending display. In this way, the performance mode due to the active display may be inherited after the start of the variable display. Data related to such look-ahead performance setting process may be stored in ROM121 or RAM122. Examples of how to use the stored data related to the look-ahead performance setting process are explained with reference to Figures 10-12.

The pre-reading effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-11 allows for reference to a reserved display image determination table constructed using data stored in ROM 121 when, for example, step AKS006 determines a reserved display image. The reserved display image determination table has a preset judgment value to be compared with the reserved display image determination random number included in the performance random number. The performance control CPU 120 can determine the performance image to be the reserved display image by extracting numerical data that is a random number for determining the reserved display image that can be updated by the random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122 and referring to the reserved display image determination table. At this time, it is sufficient to be able to determine the performance image to be the reserved display image at different rates according to the winning judgment result. Data that can identify the winning judgment result and the reserved display image can be stored in the reserved display data storage unit 002AKM01 provided in a specified area, such as the performance control buffer setting unit of RAM 122.

Figure 10-12 (A) shows an example 002AKD01 of the hold display image determination. In the pre-reading performance setting process, the hold display image can be determined to be one of several types in step AKS006. At this time, it is possible to determine a display image that will become the hold display image at different rates depending on the winning judgment result. Also, the display images that can be determined as the hold display image may differ depending on the winning judgment result. For example, if the winning judgment result is "reach confirmed on loss", "super reach confirmed on loss", or "jackpot", there is a predetermined rate at which the display image AKE2 with a green display color can be determined, whereas if the winning judgment result is "general on loss", the display image AKE2 cannot be determined as the hold display image. When the winning judgment result is "Super Reach Confirmed on Miss" or "Big Win", the display color of the display image AKE3 can be determined to be red at a predetermined rate, while when the winning judgment result is "General on Miss" or "Reach Confirmed on Miss", the display image AKE3 cannot be determined to be the reserved display image. For example, when the winning judgment result is "Big Win", the display image AKE3 is determined to be the reserved display image at a higher determination rate than when the winning judgment result is "Super Reach Confirmed on Miss", "Reach Confirmed on Miss", or "General on Miss". With such a setting, when a reserved display using a reserved display image is performed, the variable display result becomes "Big Win" at a predetermined rate according to the display color, and it can be suggested that the game state is controlled to a big win game state. In addition, the reserved display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started can be displayed in multiple display modes with different expectations of being controlled to an advantageous state such as a big win game state.

Figure 10-12 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 only needs to be capable of storing various data for displaying a pending display in the pending display area AKB0 as pending display data in response to the execution of a special game being on hold. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 may be provided with a first pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending memory display of the first special game, and a second pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending memory display of the second special game. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 has a storage area secured for storing data that identifiably indicates the winning determination result and the pending display image, for example, in association with the pending number in the pending display area AKB0. The reserved display data storage unit 002AKM01 may be configured using a part or all of the command buffer, such as a storage area for the winning judgment result command in the first start winning command buffer or the second start winning command buffer, or as a storage unit separate from the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer. The winning judgment result that can be stored by the reserved display data storage unit 002AKM01 indicates the judgment result of the pre-reading judgment specified based on the winning judgment result command. The reserved display image that can be stored by the reserved display data storage unit 002AKM01 is a performance image that is displayed in the reserved display area AKB0 based on the determination result in step AKS006, making it possible to recognize the presence or absence of special games that have not yet started and the number of reserved games.

Figure 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of a character movement performance determination process. The character movement performance determination process is included in the processes that can be called from the look-ahead performance setting process shown in Figure 10-11, and can be executed in step AKS004 when there is no judgment restriction corresponding to step AKS003. When the performance control CPU 120 executes the character movement performance determination process, it determines whether or not the character movement performance flag is on (step AKS021). The character movement performance flag is set to the on state when the execution of the character movement performance starts, and is cleared to the off state when the execution of the character movement performance ends. Therefore, the character movement performance flag being on specifies that a character movement performance is being executed.

When the character movement effect flag is on in response to step AKS021 (step AKS021; Yes), the character movement effect determination process ends. This sets a limit to prevent simultaneous or overlapping character movement effects from being executed within the range in which the character movement effects are being executed. By restricting multiple character movement effects from being executed simultaneously or overlapping, it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In contrast, when the character movement effect flag is off (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not a character movement effect will be executed (step AKS022). At this time, it is determined whether or not a character movement effect will be executed (step AKS022). Either "no character movement effect" in which no character movement effect will be executed, or "character movement effect" in which a character movement effect will be executed, is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "character movement effect" (step ASK023).

If "character movement effect is not present" but "character movement effect is not present" in response to step AKS023 (step AKS023; No), the character movement effect determination process ends. In contrast, if "character movement effect is present" (step AKS023; Yes), the type of movement effect is determined (step ASK024). Also, a pattern for the character movement effect is determined (step AKS025). Then, the character movement effect start setting is performed (step AKS026), and the character movement effect determination process ends. Such data related to the character movement effect determination process may be stored in ROM 121 or RAM 122. Examples of the use of stored data related to the character movement effect determination process are described with reference to Figures 10-14 to 10-20.

The character movement performance processing shown in FIG. 10-13 makes it possible to refer to a character movement performance execution decision table constructed using stored data in ROM 121 when, for example, determining whether or not to perform a character movement performance in step AKS022. The character movement performance execution decision table has a preset determination value that is compared with the random number for character movement performance execution decision contained in the performance random number. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes the random number for character movement performance execution decision, which can be updated by the random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and can determine whether or not to perform a character movement performance by referring to the character movement performance execution decision table.

The character movement effect processing shown in FIG. 10-13 allows for reference to a character movement effect type determination table constructed using data stored in ROM 121 when determining the type of movement effect in step AKS024, for example. The character movement effect type determination table has preset determination values that are compared with the random numbers for determining the type of character movement effect contained in the random numbers for effect. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes the random numbers for determining the type of character movement effect, which can be updated by the random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and can determine the type of movement effect to be one of multiple types by referring to the character movement effect type determination table.

The character movement presentation process shown in FIG. 10-13 allows reference to a character movement presentation pattern determination table constructed using data stored in ROM 121 when determining a character movement presentation pattern, for example, in step AKS025. The character movement presentation pattern determination table has a preset judgment value that is compared with the random number for determining a pattern during character movement presentation, which is included in the presentation random number. The presentation control CPU 120 can determine a presentation pattern that will be a character movement presentation pattern by extracting numerical data that will be a random number for determining a pattern during character movement presentation, which can be updated by a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and referring to the character movement presentation pattern determination table. Data that can identify a presentation pattern that will be a character movement presentation pattern can be stored in the character movement presentation data storage unit 002AKM02 provided in a specified area, such as the presentation control buffer setting unit of RAM 122.

Figure 10-14 (A) shows a determination example 002AKD11 regarding whether or not to perform a character movement effect. In the character movement effect determination process, the presence or absence of a character movement effect can be determined in step AKS022. At this time, it is sufficient if different determinations can be made regarding whether or not to perform a character movement effect depending on the number of reserved memories. Also, when the number of reserved memories is a specific number or more, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a character movement effect at different rates depending on the result of the judgment at the time of winning. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "1", the determination rate of "no" not performing a character movement effect is 100%, and the determination rate of "yes" performing a character movement effect is 0%. Therefore, if the number of reserved memories when a start winning occurs is "1", it is determined that the character movement effect will not be performed. In this way, a limit is set as a limit where the number of reserved memories when a start winning occurs is "1", which is a limit where the character movement effect will not be performed in the range where the number of reserved memories is less than a specific number. By restricting the execution of the character movement effect when the number of reserved memories is below a specific number, the execution time of the character movement effect can be prevented from becoming too short, appropriately increasing the interest in the effect.

In the determination example 002AKD11 of FIG. 10-14(A), when the number of reserved memories is any one of "2" to "4", the determination rate of "no" not executing the character movement effect and the determination rate of "yes" executing the character movement effect differ depending on whether the winning judgment result is "general on loss", "reach confirmed on loss", "super reach confirmed on loss", or "jackpot". For example, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", the determination of "yes" executing the character movement effect is made with a higher determination rate than when the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed on loss", "reach confirmed on loss", or "general on loss". Also, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", the determination rate of "yes" executing the character movement effect is higher than the determination rate of "no" not executing the character movement effect. When the winning judgment result is "Super Reach Confirmed on Miss", the character movement effect is determined to be "Yes" at a lower determination rate than when the winning judgment result is "Big Hit", and at a higher determination rate than when the winning judgment result is either "Reach Confirmed on Miss" or "General on Miss". Also, when the winning judgment result is "Super Reach Confirmed on Miss", the determination rate of "Yes" to execute the character movement effect is the same as the determination rate of "No" not to execute the character movement effect. When the winning judgment result is "Reach Confirmed on Miss", the character movement effect is determined to be "Yes" at a lower determination rate than when the winning judgment result is either "Big Hit" or "Super Reach Confirmed on Miss", and at a higher determination rate than when the winning judgment result is "General on Miss". When the winning judgment result is "general when losing", the character movement effect is determined to be "yes" with a lower determination rate than when the winning judgment result is either "jackpot", "super reach confirmed when losing", or "reach confirmed when losing". Also, when the winning judgment result is either "reach confirmed when losing" or "general when losing", the determination rate of "yes" for executing the character movement effect is lower than the determination rate of "no" for not executing the character movement effect. With such a setting, when the character movement effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than when the character movement effect is not executed. In addition, with any setting, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player may be higher than when the character movement effect is not executed. In this way, the character movement effect included in the specific effect can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the execution of the character movement effect is increased, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Figure 10-14 (B) shows an example of determining the movement performance type 002AKD12. In the character movement performance determination process, the movement performance type can be determined in step AKS024. In this embodiment, movement performance types RSA to RSD are prepared in advance as multiple movement performance types. The movement performance types RSA to RSD can be classified into multiple performance patterns that can be used as character movement performance patterns, and can form groups of performance patterns. The movement performance type RSA is configured to include multiple performance patterns corresponding to a second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode of the character movement performance after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. The movement performance type RSB is configured to include multiple performance patterns corresponding to a first pattern that inherits the performance mode of the character movement performance after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. The movement performance type RSC is configured to include multiple performance patterns corresponding to a case where the character movement performance is started in the first pattern, and then switched to the second pattern to execute the character movement performance. The movement performance type RSD is configured to include multiple performance patterns to accommodate cases where the character movement performance is switched to the first pattern after starting to execute the character movement performance in the second pattern.

In the determination example 002AKD12 of FIG. 10-14(B), the multiple movement presentation types RSA to RSD may be determined to one of them at different rates in response to the winning judgment result. Also, the determinable movement presentation type may differ in response to the winning judgment result. For example, when the winning judgment result is either "reach confirmed when losing", "super reach confirmed when losing", or "jackpot", the movement presentation type may be determined to one of the RSC and RSD at a predetermined rate, whereas when the winning judgment result is "general when losing", neither the RSC nor the RSD movement presentation type may be determined. For example, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", the movement presentation type is determined to be RSD at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is either "super reach confirmed when losing", "reach confirmed when losing", or "general when losing". With such settings, when a character movement effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player varies depending on whether the character movement effect is started in the first pattern, started in the second pattern, and then switched from the first pattern to the second pattern to execute the character movement effect, or switched from the second pattern to the first pattern to execute the character movement effect. In addition, with any settings, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player may vary depending on whether the character movement effect is started in the first pattern, started in the second pattern, and then switched from the first pattern to the second pattern to execute the character movement effect, or switched from the second pattern to the first pattern to execute the character movement effect. In this way, when a character movement effect is executed, the character movement effect included in the specific effect can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention to whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern is increased, thereby improving the game interest.

Figure 10-15 shows an example of the configuration of the performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSA. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSA includes performance patterns RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-2 to RPA1-2-4, RPA1-3-3, RPA1-3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-2 to RPA2-2-4, RPA2-3-3, RPA2-3-4, RPA2-4-4, RPA3-3-3, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, and RPA4-4-4 as multiple performance patterns that can be determined as character movement performance patterns. In each of the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSA, a character that can be displayed is specified in correspondence with the target change, which is the variable display that was the subject of the judgment, for the one-before-change, which is the variable display executed one time ago, the two-times-before-change, which is the variable display executed two times ago, the three-times-before-change, which is the variable display executed three times ago, and the four-times-before-change, which is the variable display executed four times ago. Note that the movement performance type RSA corresponds to a second pattern in which the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited after the variable display that was the subject of the judgment. Therefore, in each of the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSA, a character that can be displayed is not specified in correspondence with the target change, which is the variable display that was the subject of the judgment.

Figure 10-16 shows an example of the configuration of the performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSB. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSB includes a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as character movement performance patterns, including performance patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-1-4, RPB1-1-2-2 to RPB1-1-2-4, RPB1-1-3-3, RPB1-1-3-4, RPB1-1-4-4, RPB1-2-2-2 to RPB1-2-2-4, RPB1-2-3-3, RPB1-2-3-4, RPB1-2-4-4, RPB1-3 The movement performance type RSB includes the following performance patterns: -3-3, RPB1-3-3-4, RPB1-3-4-4, RPB1-4-4-4, RPB2-2-2-2 to RPB2-2-2-4, RPB2-2-3-3, RPB2-2-3-4, RPB2-2-4-4, RPB2-3-3-3, RPB2-3-3-4, RPB2-3-4-4, RPB2-4-4-4, RPB3-3-3-3, RPB3-3-3-4, RPB3-3-4-4, RPB3-4-4-4, and RPB4-4-4-4. The movement performance type RSB includes the following performance patterns: target change, one-time-ago change, two-time-ago change, three-time-ago change, and four-time-ago change. The movement effect type RSB corresponds to the first pattern that inherits the character movement effect after the variable display that was the subject of the judgment. Therefore, all of the multiple effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB also specify characters that can be displayed in response to the target change.

Figure 10-17 shows an example of the configuration of the performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSC includes performance patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4, RPC1-2-2 to RPC1-2-4, RPC1-3-3, RPC1-3-4, RPC1-4-4, RPC2-2-2 to RPC2-2-4, RPC2-3-3, RPC2-3-4, RPC2-4-4, RPC3-3-3, RPC3-3-4, RPC3-4-4, and RPC4-4-4 as multiple performance patterns that can be determined as character movement performance patterns. Each of the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC specifies characters that can be displayed corresponding to the one-before-now change, two-before-now change, three-before-now change, and four-before-now change for the target change. The movement performance type RSC corresponds to a case where, after starting the character movement performance in the first pattern, the character movement performance is switched to the second pattern. Therefore, none of the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC specify a character that can be displayed in response to the target change.

Figure 10-18 shows an example of the configuration of the performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD. In this embodiment, the movement performance type RSD includes a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined as character movement performance patterns, such as performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4, RPD1-1-2-2 to RPD1-1-2-4, RPD1-1-3-3, RPD1-1-3-4, RPD1-1-4-4, RPD1-2-2-2 to RPD1-2-2-4, RPD1-2-3-3, RPD1-2-3-4, RPD1-2-4-4, RPD1-3-3-3, RPD1-3-3-4, RPD1-3-4-4, RPD1-4-4-4, RPD2-2-2-2 to RPD2-2-2-4, RPD2-3-3-3, RPD2-3-3-4, RPD2-3-4-4, RPD2-4-4-4, RPD3-3-3-3, RPD3-3-3-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, and RPD4-4-4-4 are included. In each of the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD, a character that can be displayed is specified corresponding to the target change, the one-time previous change, the two-time previous change, the three-time previous change, and the four-time previous change. Note that the movement performance type RSD corresponds to a case where, after starting the execution of the character movement performance in the second pattern, the character movement performance is switched to the first pattern and executed. Therefore, for each of the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD, characters that can be displayed in response to the target change are also specified.

In the configuration examples shown in Fig. 10-14 to Fig. 10-18, for all of the performance patterns, the common characters are specified as the characters that can be displayed in response to the 3rd back change and the 4th back change. Therefore, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", the execution of the character movement performance is started, and characters are displayed in response to the 4th back change and the 3rd back change, and the common characters are displayed unchanged. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3", the character specified in response to the 4th back change is not displayed, and the display starts from the character specified in response to the 3rd back change. When the number of reserved memories is "2", the characters specified in response to the 4th back change and the 3rd back change are not displayed, and the display starts from the character specified in response to the 2nd back change. A performance pattern in which different characters are specified may be provided for the characters that can be displayed in response to the 3rd back change and the 4th back change.

The multiple presentation patterns have different designations for the characters that can be displayed corresponding to each change. For example, in the multiple presentation patterns included in the movement presentation type RSA, in presentation pattern RPA1-1-1, character CH01 is displayed unchanged from the 4th previous change to the 1st previous change, and then the execution of the character movement presentation ends. In presentation pattern RPA1-1-2, character CH01 is displayed unchanged from the 4th previous change to the 2nd previous change, and then it can change to character CH02 and be displayed in the 1st previous change, and then the execution of the character movement presentation ends. In presentation pattern RPA1-2-3, character CH01 is displayed unchanged from the 4th previous change and the 3rd previous change, and then it can change to character CH02 and be displayed in the 2nd previous change, and it can change to character CH03 and be displayed in the 1st previous change, and then the execution of the character movement presentation ends.

In the multiple presentation patterns included in the movement presentation type RSB, presentation pattern RPB1-1-1-1 displays character CH11 unchanged from the 4th previous change to the target change, and then the execution of the character movement presentation ends. In presentation pattern RPB1-1-1-2, character CH11 is displayed unchanged from the 4th previous change to the 1st previous change, and then it can change to character CH12 and be displayed in the target change, and then the execution of the character movement presentation ends. In presentation pattern RPB1-2-3-4, character CH11 is displayed unchanged from the 4th previous change and the 3rd previous change, and then it can change to character CH12 and be displayed in the 2nd previous change, the 1st previous change and it can change to character CH03 and be displayed, and the target change and be displayed in the target change, and then the execution of the character movement presentation ends.

Among the multiple presentation patterns included in the movement presentation type RSC, presentation pattern RPC1-1-1-1 shows character CH11 being displayed unchanged from the 4th previous change to the start of the 2nd previous change, then character CH11 is switched to character CH01 for the 2nd previous change, and character CH01 can be displayed unchanged for the 1st previous change, after which the execution of the character movement presentation ends. Presentation pattern RPC1-1-1-2 shows character CH11 being displayed unchanged from the 4th previous change to the start of the 2nd previous change, then character CH11 is switched to character CH01 for the 2nd previous change, and character CH02 can be displayed for the 1st previous change, after which the execution of the character movement presentation ends.

In the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD, performance pattern RPD1-1-1-1 displays character CH01 unchanged from the 4th previous change to the start of the 2nd previous change, then switches from character CH01 to character CH11 in the 2nd previous change, and character CH11 can be displayed unchanged in the 1st previous change and target change, and then the execution of the character movement performance ends. Performance pattern RPD1-1-1-2 displays character CH01 unchanged from the 4th previous change to the start of the 2nd previous change, then switches from character CH01 to character CH11 in the 2nd previous change, and character CH11 can be displayed unchanged in the 1st previous change, and character CH12 can be displayed in the target change, and then the execution of the character movement performance ends. In this way, the performance patterns that are character movement performance patterns used to execute the character movement performance are performance patterns in which different characters can be displayed corresponding to the numbers included in the codes attached to each of them.

In the multiple presentation patterns included in the movement presentation type RSA, after a variable display capable of displaying character CH01, any of characters CH01 to CH04 can be displayed. After a variable display capable of displaying character CH02, any of characters CH02 to CH04 can be displayed, but character CH01 is never displayed. After a variable display capable of displaying character CH03, any of characters CH03 or CH04 can be displayed, but character CH01 or CH02 is never displayed. After a variable display capable of displaying character CH04, character CH04 can be displayed, but any of characters CH01 to CH03 is never displayed.

In the multiple presentation patterns included in the movement presentation type RSB, after a variable display capable of displaying character CH11, any of characters CH11 to CH14 can be displayed. After a variable display capable of displaying character CH12, any of characters CH12 to CH14 can be displayed, but character CH11 is never able to be displayed. After a variable display capable of displaying character CH13, any of characters CH13 or CH14 can be displayed, but neither characters CH11 or CH12 can be displayed. After a variable display capable of displaying character CH14, character CH14 can be displayed, but none of characters CH11 to CH13 can be displayed.

The multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC switch the characters that can be displayed in response to the first pattern to the characters that can be displayed in response to the second pattern in the second previous change, making it possible to execute the character movement performance. Before switching the characters in the second previous change, similar to the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSB, characters that can be displayed in the current variable display corresponding to the characters displayed in the previous variable display and characters that cannot be displayed in the current variable display are provided. After switching the characters in the second previous change, similar to the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSA, characters that can be displayed in the current variable display corresponding to the characters displayed in the previous variable display and characters that cannot be displayed in the current variable display are provided. Note that the variable display that switches the characters that can be displayed in response to the first pattern to the characters that can be displayed in response to the second pattern is not limited to the variable display that is the second previous change, and in any variable display that can execute the character movement performance, it may be possible to switch the characters that can be displayed in response to the first pattern to the characters that can be displayed in response to the second pattern.

The multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD switch the characters that can be displayed in response to the second pattern in the second previous change to characters that can be displayed in response to the first pattern, making it possible to execute the character movement performance. Before switching the characters in the second previous change, similar to the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSA, characters that can be displayed in the current variable display corresponding to the characters displayed in the previous variable display and characters that cannot be displayed in the current variable display are provided. After switching the characters in the second previous change, similar to the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSB, characters that can be displayed in the current variable display corresponding to the characters displayed in the previous variable display and characters that cannot be displayed in the current variable display are provided. Note that the variable display that switches the characters that can be displayed in response to the second pattern to the characters that can be displayed in response to the first pattern is not limited to the variable display that is the second previous change, and in any variable display that can execute the character movement performance, it may be possible to switch the characters that can be displayed in response to the second pattern to the characters that can be displayed in response to the first pattern.

Figures 10-19 and 10-20 include examples of determining a presentation pattern that will be a character movement presentation pattern. In these examples, different presentation patterns can be determined depending on the result of determining the movement presentation type. Figure 10-19 (A) shows a determination example 002AKD13 when the movement presentation type is RSA, Figure 10-19 (B) shows a determination example 002AKD14 when the movement presentation type is RSB, Figure 10-20 (A) shows a determination example 002AKD15 when the movement presentation type is RSC, and Figure 10-20 (B) shows a determination example 002AKD16 when the movement presentation type is RSD. In step AKS025 of the character movement presentation determination process shown in Figure 10-13, it is possible to determine one of the presentation patterns included in the movement presentation type determined in step AKS024 to be a character movement presentation pattern. In this case, it is sufficient if the presentation pattern can be determined with a probability corresponding to a loss when the winning judgment result is either "general when losing", "reach confirmed when losing", or "super reach confirmed when losing", and a jackpot when the winning judgment result is "jackpot".

In determination example 002AKD13 when the movement presentation type is RSA, the determination rate of presentation pattern RPA1-1-1 is the highest when there is a miss, and the determination rate of presentation patterns that can display character CH04, such as presentation patterns RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-4, RPA1-3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-4, RPA2-3-4, RPA2-4-4, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, RPA4-4-4, is the lowest. In determination example 002AKD13 when the movement presentation type is RSA, the determination rate of presentation pattern RPA1-1-1 is also the highest when there is a jackpot. However, the determination rate is lower when there is a jackpot than when there is a miss. In the determination example 002AKD13 for the movement presentation type RSA, even during a jackpot, the determination rate of presentation patterns capable of displaying character CH04, such as presentation patterns RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-4, RPA1-3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-4, RPA2-3-4, RPA2-4-4, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, and RPA4-4-4, is the lowest. However, the determination rate of these is higher during a jackpot than during a miss. Therefore, when a character movement presentation is executed using a presentation pattern included in the movement presentation type RSA, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher when character CH04 is displayed than when character CH04 is not displayed.

In decision example 002AKD14 when the movement performance type is RSB, the decision rate of performance pattern RPB1-1-1-1 is the highest when a miss occurs, and performance patterns that can display character CH14, such as performance patterns RPB1-1-1-4, RPB1-1-2-4, RPB1-1-3-4, RPB1-1-4-4, RPB1-2-2-4, RPB1-2-3-4, RPB1-2-4-4, RPB1-3-3-4, RPB1-3-4-4, and RPB1-4-4-4, are included in the performance patterns with the lowest decision rate. In the determination example 002AKD14 when the moving presentation type is RSB, the determination rate of the presentation pattern in which character CH11 is not displayed but character CH14 can be displayed, such as presentation patterns RPB2-2-2-4, RPB2-2-3-4, RPB2-2-4-4, RPB2-3-3-4, RPB2-3-4-4, RPB2-4-4-4, RPB3-3-3-4, RPB3-3-4-4, RPB3-4-4-4, RPB4-4-4-4, etc., corresponding to the jackpot, is the highest. In the determination example 002AKD14 when the moving presentation type is RSB, the determination rate of the presentation pattern RPB1-1-1-1 corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, when a character movement effect is executed using the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSB, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher when character CH11 is not displayed and character CH14 is displayed than when character CH14 is not displayed and character CH11 is displayed.

In example 002AKD15 when the movement presentation type is RSC, the presentation pattern determination rate is a common determination rate of 5% in response to a miss. In example 002AKD15 when the movement presentation type is RSC, in response to a jackpot, some of the presentation patterns that do not display character CH11 when the character movement presentation is executed in the first pattern, such as presentation patterns RPC2-4-4, RPC3-3-4, RPC3-4-4, and RPC4-4-4, and that can display character CH04 when the character movement presentation is executed in the second pattern, have the highest determination rate. In the determination example 002AKD15 when the movement performance type is RSC, the performance pattern that can display character CH11 when the character movement performance is executed in the first pattern, such as performance patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4, RPC1-2-2 to RPC1-2-4, RPC1-3-3, RPC1-3-4, and RPC1-4-4, corresponding to the jackpot, has the lowest determination rate. Therefore, among the cases in which the character movement performance is executed in the performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSC, when character CH11 when the character movement performance is executed in the first pattern is not displayed and character CH04 when the character movement performance is executed in the second pattern is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than when character CH11 when the character movement performance is executed in the first pattern is displayed.

In decision example 002AKD16 when the movement performance type is RSD, the decision rate of performance pattern RPD2-2-2-2 is the highest when it misses, and performance patterns such as RPD2-2-2-4, RPD2-3-3-4, RPD2-3-4-4, RPD2-4-4-4, RPD3-3-3-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, RPD4-4-4-4, etc., which do not display character CH01 when the character movement performance is executed in the second pattern, and can display character CH14 when the character movement performance is executed in the first pattern, have the lowest decision rate. In the determination example 002AKD16 when the movement presentation type is RSD, the presentation pattern that corresponds to a jackpot, such as presentation patterns RPD3-4-4-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, RPD4-4-4-4, etc., in which characters CH01 and CH02 are not displayed when the character movement presentation is executed in the second pattern, and character CH14 is displayed when the character movement presentation is executed in the first pattern, has the highest determination rate. In determination example 002AKD16 when the movement presentation type is RSD, the presentation pattern that can display character CH01 when a character movement presentation is executed in the second pattern, such as presentation patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4, RPD1-1-2-2 to RPD1-2-2-4, RPD1-1-3-3, RPD1-1-3-4, RPD1-1-4-4, RPD1-2-2-2 to RPD1-2-2-4, RPD1-2-3-3, RPD1-2-3-4, RPD1-2-4-4, RPD1-3-3-3, RPD1-3-3-4, RPD1-3-4-4, and RPD1-4-4-4, corresponding to a jackpot, has the lowest determination rate. Therefore, when a character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD, if character CH01 is not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, and character CH14 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, there is a higher expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, than if character CH01 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern.

The first pattern is an execution pattern of a character movement effect in which the performance mode in the character movement effect before the variable display that was the subject of the judgment of whether or not it is controlled to a jackpot game state is inherited after the variable display. The second pattern is an execution pattern of a character movement effect in which the performance mode in the character movement effect before the variable display that was the subject of the judgment of whether or not it is controlled to a jackpot game state is not inherited after the variable display. The determination rate of the performance pattern may be set so that the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when character CH04 is displayed than when character CH01 is displayed among the cases in which the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. The determination rate of the performance pattern may be set so that the expectation of a jackpot is highest when character CH04 is displayed among the cases in which the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, and the expectation of a jackpot is lower in the cases where character CH03, character CH02, and character CH01 are displayed. The determination rate of the presentation pattern may be set so that, among the cases where the character movement presentation is executed in the first pattern, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when character CH14 is displayed than when character CH11 is displayed. The determination rate of the presentation pattern may be set so that, among the cases where the character movement presentation is executed in the first pattern, the expectation of a jackpot is highest when character CH14 is displayed, and the expectation of a jackpot decreases accordingly when character CH13, character CH12, and character CH11 are displayed.

In the character movement performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern to be the character movement performance pattern in step ASK025, and then performs the character movement performance start setting in step AKS026 to control the start of the character movement performance. For example, in response to the performance pattern determined in step AKS025, a performance control pattern for the character movement performance that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is read out. In response to the control data included in this performance control pattern, a performance execution instruction is sent to the display control unit 123 to display a performance image showing a character on the screen of the image display device 5, and the execution of the character movement performance can be started. When the execution of the character movement performance is started, the character movement performance flag is set to the ON state. In addition, the count initial value of the character display counter is set in response to the reserved memory number. The data that identifiably indicates the character movement performance flag and the count value of the character display counter can be stored in the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 provided in a specified area together with the data that identifiably indicates the performance pattern to be the character movement performance pattern.

Figure 10-20 (C) shows an example of the configuration of the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02. The character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 stores a character movement performance flag, a performance pattern, a character display counter, and a concealment performance flag, and the performance pattern that can be stored by the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 indicates a performance pattern determined as a character movement performance pattern. The count value of the character display counter may be set as the initial value of the reserved memory number when starting the execution of the character movement performance, and may be subtracted by 1 each time a variable display is executed, so that the remaining number of times until the variable display that is the subject of the judgment can be counted. The performance control CPU 120 may specify the character to be displayed in the character movement performance by using data indicating the performance pattern and data indicating the count value of the character display counter, which are among the data stored in the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02. The stored data of the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 includes data that can specify the concealment performance flag. The concealment effect flag is set to the ON state when the execution of the character concealment effect starts, and is cleared to the OFF state when the execution of the character concealment effect ends. Therefore, when the concealment effect flag is ON, it specifies that the character concealment effect is being executed.

Figure 10-21 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer effect determination process. The timer effect determination process is included in the processes that can be called from the look-ahead effect setting process shown in Figure 10-11, and can be executed in step AKS005 after the character movement effect determination process in step AKS004 has been executed. When the effect control CPU 120 executes the timer effect determination process, it determines whether the timer effect flag is on (step AKS031). The timer effect flag is set to the on state when the execution of a timer standby effect starts based on the decision result to execute a timer effect, and is cleared to the off state when the execution of the timer effect executed following the timer standby effect ends. Therefore, the timer effect flag being on specifies that a timer standby effect or timer effect is being executed.

If the timer performance flag is on in response to step ASK031 (step AKS031; Yes), the timer performance determination process ends. This sets a limit to prevent timer standby performances and timer performances from being executed simultaneously or overlapping to the extent that the timer standby performances and timer performances are being executed. By restricting the execution of multiple timer standby performances and timer performances so that they are not executed simultaneously or overlapping, it is possible to prevent the performances from becoming complicated and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In contrast, if the timer performance flag is off (step AKS31; No), it is determined whether or not a timer performance is to be executed (step AKS032). At this time, it is determined whether or not a timer performance is to be executed (no timer performance), in which the timer performance is not executed, or whether or not a timer performance is executed (timer performance). Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "timer performance" (step AKS033).

If "timer effect is not present" but "timer effect is not present" in response to step AKS033 (step AKS033; No), the timer effect determination process ends. In contrast, if "timer effect is present" (step AKS033; Yes), a timer effect pattern is determined (step AKS034). A standby effect pattern is also determined (step AKS035). Then, the timer standby effect start setting is performed (step AKS036), and the timer effect determination process ends. Such data related to the timer effect determination process may be stored in ROM 121 or RAM 122. Examples of the use of data related to the timer effect determination process are described with reference to Figures 10-22 and 10-23.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, for example, when determining whether or not to execute a timer effect in step AKS032, makes it possible to refer to a timer effect execution determination table constructed using stored data in ROM 121. The timer effect execution determination table has preset determination values that are compared with the random numbers for timer effect execution determination contained in the random numbers for effect. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes the random numbers for timer effect execution determination, which can be updated by the random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and can determine whether or not to execute a timer effect by referring to the timer effect execution determination table.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 allows reference to a timer effect pattern determination table constructed using data stored in ROM 121 when determining a timer effect pattern in step AKS034, for example. The timer effect pattern determination table has a preset judgment value that is compared with the random number for determining a timer effect pattern included in the effect random number. The effect control CPU 120 can determine an effect pattern that will be a timer effect pattern by extracting numerical data that will be a random number for determining a timer effect pattern that can be updated by a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and by referring to the timer effect pattern determination table. Data that can identify the effect pattern that will be a timer effect pattern can be stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 provided in a specified area, such as the effect control buffer setting unit of RAM 122.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 allows reference to a standby effect pattern determination table constructed using stored data in ROM 121 when determining a standby effect pattern in step AKS035, for example. The standby effect pattern determination table has a preset judgment value that is compared with the standby effect pattern determination random number included in the performance random number. The performance control CPU 120 can determine the standby effect pattern by extracting numerical data that is a random number for determining a standby effect pattern that can be updated by a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and by referring to the standby effect pattern determination table. Data that can identify the standby effect pattern can be stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 provided in a specified area, such as the performance control buffer setting unit of RAM 122.

Figure 10-22 shows a determination example 002AKD21 regarding whether or not to perform a timer performance. In the timer performance determination process, the presence or absence of a timer performance can be determined in step AKS032. At this time, it is sufficient if different decisions regarding the presence or absence of a timer performance can be made depending on the number of reserved memories. Also, when the number of reserved memories is a specific number or more, it is sufficient if the presence or absence of a timer performance can be determined at different rates depending on the result of the judgment at the time of winning. Furthermore, even with a common judgment result at the time of winning, it may be possible to determine the presence or absence of a timer performance at different rates depending on the number of reserved memories that is a specific number or more. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "1", the determination rate of "no" which does not execute the timer performance is 100%, and the determination rate of "yes" which executes the timer performance is 0%. Therefore, if the number of reserved memories when the start winning occurs is "1", it is determined that the timer performance will not be executed. In this way, a limit is set as a limit where the timer performance is not executed in the range where the number of reserved memories is less than a specific number, that is, the number of reserved memories when the start winning occurs is "1". By restricting the timer effect from being executed when the number of reserved memories is below a certain number, it is possible to ensure that the timer standby effect is executed for a certain amount of time, thereby appropriately increasing the interest in the effect.

In the determination example 002AKD21 of FIG. 10-22, when the number of reserved memories is any one of "2" to "4", the determination rate of "no" not executing the timer performance and the determination rate of "yes" executing the timer performance differ depending on whether the winning judgment result is "general on loss", "reach confirmed on loss", "super reach confirmed on loss", or "jackpot". Also, even if the winning judgment result is the same, the determination rate of "no" not executing the timer performance and the determination rate of "yes" executing the timer performance may differ depending on whether the number of reserved memories is any one of "2" to "4". For example, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", the determination of "yes" executing the timer performance is made with a higher determination rate than when the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed on loss", "reach confirmed on loss", or "general on loss". In addition, when the winning judgment result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of "yes" to execute the timer effect is higher than the determination rate of "no" to not execute the timer effect. When the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed when losing", the timer effect is determined to be "yes" at a lower determination rate than when the winning judgment result is a "jackpot", and at a higher determination rate than when the winning judgment result is either "reach confirmed when losing" or "general when losing". When the winning judgment result is "reach confirmed when losing", the timer effect is determined to be "yes" at a lower determination rate than when the winning judgment result is either "jackpot" or "super reach confirmed when losing", and at a higher determination rate than when the winning judgment result is "general when losing". When the winning judgment result is "general when losing", the timer performance is determined to be "yes" with a lower probability than when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", "super reach confirmed when losing", or "reach confirmed when losing". Also, when the winning judgment result is "reach confirmed when losing" or "general when losing", the probability of "yes" for executing the timer performance is lower than the probability of "no" for not executing the timer performance. With this setting, when the timer performance is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the timer performance is not executed. In this way, the timer performance in which a specific display is performed can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the execution of the timer performance can be increased, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the example 002AKD21 of FIG. 10-22, when the winning judgment result is "general on loss", the probability of "yes" to execute the timer effect is higher when the number of reserved memories is "3" than when it is "4", and also higher when the number of reserved memories is "2" than when it is "3". When the winning judgment result is "reach confirmed on loss", the probability of "yes" to execute the timer effect is higher when the number of reserved memories is "3" than when it is "4", and also higher when the number of reserved memories is "2" than when it is "3". When the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed on loss", the probability of "yes" to execute the timer effect is higher when the number of reserved memories is "3" than when it is "4", and also the probability is 50%, which is the same for when the number of reserved memories is "3" and "2". In contrast, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", the determination rate of "yes" to execute the timer effect is highest when the number of reserved memories is "4", lower when the number of reserved memories is "3" than when the number of reserved memories is "4", and lower when the number of reserved memories is "2" than when the number of reserved memories is "3". With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is large when it is judged that the timer effect is to be executed, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the number of reserved memories is small. In addition, by any setting, when the number of reserved memories is large when it is judged that the timer effect is to be executed, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the number of reserved memories is small. The timer effect starts to be executed in response to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. The timer standby effect can be executed over multiple variable displays before the timing at which the execution of the timer effect starts. In addition, when the number of reserved memories is large, the execution time of the timer standby effect is long, and compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is small, the expectation that the player will be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is higher. In this way, the timer standby effect and the timer effect can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the execution time of the timer standby effect can be increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Figure 10-23 (A) shows an example 002AKD22 of determining a performance pattern to be a timer performance pattern. In this embodiment, four performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4 are prepared in advance as multiple performance patterns that can be determined as timer performance patterns. The number of performance patterns that can be determined as timer performance patterns may be multiple patterns based on any design. The execution time of the timer performance is set to be different in accordance with the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4. For example, the execution time of the timer performance of performance pattern TPA1 is 5 seconds, the execution time of the timer performance of performance pattern TPA2 is 10 seconds, the execution time of the timer performance of performance pattern TPA3 is 15 seconds, and the execution time of the timer performance of performance pattern TPA4 is 20 seconds. In accordance with the different execution times of the timer performance, the period during which a specific display can be displayed in the timer performance can also be different. For example, a specific display can be displayed for a longer period when a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA2 than when a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA1. A specific display can be displayed for a longer period of time when a timer performance is performed in performance pattern TPA3 than when a timer performance is performed in performance pattern TPA2. A specific display can be displayed for a longer period of time when a timer performance is performed in performance pattern TPA4 than when a timer performance is performed in performance pattern TPA3.

In step AKS034 of the timer performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, it is possible to determine one of the multiple performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4 prepared in advance as a timer performance pattern. At this time, it is sufficient if different performance patterns can be determined in response to the winning judgment result of "general when losing", "reach confirmed when losing", "super reach confirmed when losing", and "jackpot". It is also possible to determine performance patterns at different rates in response to the winning judgment result. For example, when the winning judgment result is "general when losing", the determination rate of performance pattern TPA1 as a timer performance pattern is 100%, and the determination rate of performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4 is 0%. Therefore, if the winning judgment result is "general when losing", the performance pattern TPA1 is determined as the timer performance pattern, and the performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4 are not determined. In this way, in the range where the winning judgment result is "general when losing", which is the most unfavorable judgment result for the player among cases where the game state is not controlled to a jackpot game state, a restriction is set as a limit that the timer performance is not executed in a specific performance pattern. Also, if the winning judgment result is "reach confirmed when losing", the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3 can be determined as timer performance patterns, and performance pattern TPA4 cannot be determined. In this way, in the range where the winning judgment result is "reach confirmed when losing", a restriction is set as a limit that the timer performance is not executed in a special performance pattern. By restricting the timer performance from being executed in a specific or special performance pattern when the judgment result is unfavorable to the player, the timer performance can be executed appropriately so that the player's expectations raised by the timer performance are not likely to decrease, and the interest in the game can be increased.

In determination example 002AKD22 in Figure 10-23 (A), for example, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot," presentation pattern TPA4 is determined as the timer presentation pattern with a higher probability of being determined than when the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed on miss," "reach confirmed on miss," or "general on miss." Also, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot," the determination rate of presentation pattern TPA4 is higher than the determination rates of the other presentation patterns TPA1 to TPA3. When the winning judgment result is "super reach confirmed on miss," presentation pattern TPA4 is determined with a lower probability of being determined than when the winning judgment result is "jackpot," and also with a lower probability of being determined than presentation patterns TPA1 to TPA3. With such a setting, when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the timer effect is executed in any of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. In addition, with any setting, when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the timer effect is executed in any of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. The effect pattern TPA4 is the effect pattern with the longest execution time of the timer effect among the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4, and is the effect pattern that can display the specific display for the longest period of time. When the winning judgment result is a jackpot, the determination rate of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3 is the common determination rate of 20%. In contrast, when the winning judgment result is either "general when losing", "reach confirmed when losing", or "super reach confirmed when losing", the performance pattern TPA1 has the highest determination rate, the performance pattern TPA2 has the next highest determination rate, and the performance pattern TPA3 has the lowest determination rate. Performance pattern TPA3 is a performance pattern in which the execution time of the timer performance is shorter than that of performance pattern TPA4, performance pattern TPA2 is a performance pattern in which the execution time of the timer performance is shorter than that of performance pattern TPA1, and performance pattern TPA1 is a performance pattern in which the execution time of the timer performance is the shortest. Therefore, in a variable display in which a timer performance is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period of time than when the specific display is displayed for a short period of time. In this way, the timer performance in which the specific display is displayed can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention is increased to the execution of the timer performance in the special performance pattern and the specific display being displayed for a long period of time, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Figure 10-23 (B) shows an example 002AKD23 of determining a presentation pattern that will be a standby presentation pattern. In this embodiment, five presentation patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1, and TPB2-2 are prepared in advance as multiple presentation patterns that can be determined as standby presentation patterns. The number of presentation patterns that can be determined as standby presentation patterns may be multiple patterns based on any design. The presentation modes of the timer standby presentation are set to be different in accordance with presentation patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1, and TPB2-2. For example, presentation pattern TPB0 executes a timer standby presentation in a continuation presentation mode in which the specific display using display image AKJ0 does not change. Presentation pattern TPB1-1 executes a timer standby presentation in a change display mode in which the specific display using display image AKJ0 changes to a first change display using display image AKJ1. In presentation pattern TPB1-1, a timer standby presentation is executed in a change display mode in which a specific display using display image AKJ0 changes to a second change display using display image AKJ2. In presentation pattern TPB2-1, a timer standby presentation is executed in a continuation presentation mode, and a preliminary presentation is executed by displaying display image AKJ11 separately from the specific display using display image AKJ0. In presentation pattern TPB2-2, a timer standby presentation is executed in a continuation presentation mode, and a preliminary presentation is executed by displaying display image AKJ12 separately from the specific display using display image AKJ0.

In step AKS035 of the timer performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, it is possible to determine one of the multiple performance patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1, and TPB2-2 prepared in advance as a standby performance pattern. At this time, it is sufficient if a different performance pattern can be determined in response to the determination result of the performance pattern to be the timer performance pattern in step AKS034. It is also possible to determine performance patterns to be standby performance patterns at different rates in response to the determination result of the performance pattern to be the timer performance pattern. For example, when performance pattern TPA1 is determined as the timer performance pattern, it is possible to determine one of performance patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB2-1 as the standby performance pattern, and performance patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2-2 are not determined. When presentation pattern TPA2 is determined as the timer presentation pattern, any of presentation patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB2-1 can be determined as the standby presentation pattern, and presentation patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2-2 are not determined. When presentation pattern TPA3 is determined as the timer presentation pattern, any of presentation patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2-1 can be determined as the standby presentation pattern, and presentation patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB2-2 are not determined. When presentation pattern TPA4 is determined as the timer presentation pattern, any of presentation patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 can be determined as the standby presentation pattern, and presentation patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB1-2 are not determined.

When the timer performance pattern is performance pattern TPA1, performance pattern TPB0 is determined as the standby performance pattern with the highest decision rate, and is also determined as the standby performance pattern with a higher decision rate than when the timer performance pattern is any of performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4. When the timer performance pattern is performance pattern TPA2, performance pattern TPB1-1 is determined as the standby performance pattern with a higher decision rate than when the timer performance pattern is performance pattern TPA1, but is not determined as the standby performance pattern when the timer performance pattern is any of performance patterns TPA3 or TPA4. When the timer performance pattern is performance pattern TPA3, performance pattern TPB1-2 is determined as the standby performance pattern with the highest decision rate, but is not determined as the standby performance pattern when the timer performance pattern is any of performance patterns TPA1, TPA2, or TPA4. When the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA2, the performance pattern TPB2-1 is determined as the standby performance pattern with the highest decision rate, and is determined as the standby performance pattern with a higher decision rate than when the timer performance pattern is any of the performance patterns TPA1, TPA3, and TPA4. When the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA4, the performance pattern TPB2-2 is determined as the standby performance pattern with the highest decision rate, but is not determined as the standby performance pattern when the timer performance pattern is any of the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3. With this setting, when the timer standby performance is executed in any of the performance patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2, the execution time of the timer performance is likely to be longer than when the timer standby performance is executed in the performance pattern TPB0. Therefore, the specific display in the timer performance can be displayed for a longer period of time when the timer standby performance is executed in the change performance mode and the change performance is executed, compared to when the timer standby performance is executed in the continuation performance mode and the change performance is not executed. Also, when a timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode and a previous stage effect is executed without executing a change effect, it may be possible to display the specific effect in the timer effect for a longer period of time than when a timer standby effect is executed in the change effect mode and a change effect is executed. In this way, even if the timer standby effect is not executed in the change effect mode and the specific display does not change, the previous stage effect is executed to increase anticipation for the timer effect, so that the change effect and previous stage effect can be appropriately executed to increase the sense of surprise when the specific display does not change, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the timer performance determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern to be the timer performance pattern in step AKS035, and then performs the timer standby performance start setting in step AKS036 to set the timer standby performance to be able to start execution. For example, in response to the performance pattern determined in step AKS035, a performance control pattern for the timer standby performance that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is read out. In response to the control data included in this performance control pattern, a performance execution instruction is sent to the display control unit 123 to display a display image AKJ1 or the like as a specific display including a specific character on the screen of the image display device 5, and execution of the timer standby performance can be started. When execution of the timer standby performance is started, the timer performance flag is set to the ON state. In addition, the count initial value of the remaining number counter is set in response to the reserved memory number. Data that identifiably indicates the timer performance flag and the count value of the remaining number counter can be stored in the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03 provided in a specified area, together with data that identifiably indicates the performance pattern that will be the timer performance pattern and the standby performance pattern.

Figure 10-23 (C) shows an example of the configuration of the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03. The timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03 has a storage area reserved for storing data that identifiably indicates a timer performance flag, a timer performance pattern, a standby performance pattern, and a remaining number counter. The timer performance pattern that can be stored by the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03 indicates a performance pattern determined as a timer performance pattern. The standby performance pattern that can be stored by the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03 indicates a performance pattern determined as a standby performance pattern. The count value of the remaining number counter is set, for example, to the reserved memory number when starting execution of the timer standby performance as an initial value, and by subtracting 1 each time a variable display is executed, it is sufficient that it is possible to count the remaining number of times until the variable display that is the subject of the judgment is executed.

Figure 10-24 is a flowchart showing an example of character movement performance in-progress processing. Character movement performance in-progress processing is included in processing that can be called from the look-ahead performance setting processing shown in Figure 10-11, and can be executed in step ASK009 when it is shift timing corresponding to step AKS008. When the performance control CPU 120 executes character movement performance in-progress processing, it determines whether the character movement performance flag is on (step ASK041). If the character movement performance flag is off (step ASK041; No), the character movement performance in-progress processing ends, corresponding to the fact that the character movement performance is not being executed.

When the character movement effect flag is on in response to step AKS041 (step AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether the concealment effect flag is on (step ASK042). When the concealment effect flag is off (step AKS042; No), it is determined whether or not a character concealment effect is to be performed (step AKS043). At this time, it is determined whether or not there is a character concealment effect, either "no character concealment effect" in which the character concealment effect is not performed, or "character concealment effect" in which the character concealment effect is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "character concealment effect" (step ASK044). When there is "character concealment effect" (step AKS044; Yes), the character concealment effect start setting is performed (step AKS045), and the character movement effect execution processing ends. The character concealment effect start setting includes a setting to start the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect, overlapping with the display position of the character in the character movement effect. This allows the execution of a character hiding effect to begin as a special effect that makes the specific character movement effect invisible.

If the concealment effect flag is on in response to step AKS042 (step AKS042; Yes), character concealment control is determined (step ASK046). At this time, one of the following is determined: "continue concealment," which continues the character concealment effect; "resume display," which ends the character concealment effect and resumes display in the character movement effect; or "end display," which ends the character concealment effect and also ends display in the character movement effect. Then, it is determined whether this determination result is "continue concealment" (step AKS047). If it is "continue concealment" (step AKS047; Yes), the character movement effect execution processing ends.

If the answer in step AKS047 is not "continue hiding" (step AKS047; No), it is determined whether the result of the decision in step AKS046 is "resume display" (step AKS048). If the answer is "resume display" (step AKS048; Yes), a character movement effect resumption setting is performed (step AKS049). The character movement effect resumption setting includes a setting to end the concealment display CK01 in the character hiding effect that was performed overlapping with the display position of the character in the character movement effect. This makes it possible to end the execution of the character hiding effect as a special effect that makes the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, invisible, and resume the character movement effect, which is a specific effect.

If "resume display" is not selected in response to step AKS048 (step AKS048; No), the result of the determination in step AKS046 corresponds to "end display", and a character movement effect end setting is made (step AKS050), and the character movement effect execution processing ends. The character movement effect end setting includes a setting to end the hidden display CK01 in the character hiding effect, as well as a setting to end the execution of the character movement effect. For example, the stored data in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02 is cleared and initialized. This ends the execution of the character hiding effect as a special effect that makes the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, invisible, and allows the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, to be ended without resuming it.

In the case of "no character hiding effect" rather than "with character hiding effect" corresponding to step AKS044 (step AKS044), after the character movement effect resumption setting is performed in step AKS049, the presence or absence of a switching suggestion effect is determined (step AKS051). At this time, either "no switching suggestion effect" in which the switching suggestion effect is not executed, or "with switching suggestion effect" in which the switching suggestion effect is executed, is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "with switching suggestion effect" (step AKS052). In the case of "without switching suggestion effect" rather than "with switching suggestion effect" (step AKS052; No), the character movement effect execution processing ends. In contrast, in the case of "with switching suggestion effect" (step AKS052; Yes), the switching suggestion effect execution setting is performed (step AKS053), and the character movement effect execution processing ends. An example of the use of the stored data related to the character movement effect execution processing will be described with reference to FIG. 10-25.

The character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24 makes it possible to refer to a character hiding effect execution decision table constructed using stored data in ROM 121 when, for example, determining whether or not to execute a character hiding effect in step AKS043. The character hiding effect execution decision table has preset determination values that are compared with the random numbers for determining whether or not to execute a character hiding effect, which are included in the random numbers for effect. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes the random numbers for determining whether or not to execute a character hiding effect, which can be updated by the random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and can determine whether or not to execute a character hiding effect by referring to the character hiding effect execution decision table.

The character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24 makes it possible to refer to a character hiding control determination table constructed using data stored in ROM 121 when determining character hiding control, for example, in step AKS046. The character hiding control determination table has preset judgment values that are compared with the random numbers for determining character hiding control contained in the effect random numbers. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the control content for character hiding control by extracting numerical data that becomes the random numbers for determining character hiding control, which can be updated by a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and referring to the character hiding control determination table.

The character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24 allows reference to a switching suggestion effect execution decision table constructed using the stored data in ROM 121 when, for example, step AKS051 is used to determine whether or not to perform a switching suggestion effect. The switching suggestion effect execution decision table has a preset judgment value to be compared with the random number for switching suggestion effect execution decision included in the random number for effect. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is a random number for switching suggestion effect execution decision that can be updated by a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122, and can determine whether or not to perform a switching suggestion effect by referring to the switching suggestion effect execution decision table. In addition, when the movement effect type is either RSC or RSD, it may be determined that a switching suggestion effect is always executed in response to the execution of a variable display that changes two times back. In contrast, when the movement effect type is either RSA or RSB, it may be determined whether or not to perform a switching suggestion effect at a predetermined rate in response to the execution of a variable display that changes two times back. With this setting, when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern and when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, a switch suggestion effect is executed in response to switching and executing the character movement effect, and a false effect or switch failure effect can be executed in which a switch suggestion effect is executed in response to executing the character movement effect without switching.

Figure 10-25 (A) shows a decision example 002AKD31 regarding whether or not to perform a character hiding effect. In the character movement effect execution process, the decision can be made in step AKS043 as to whether or not to perform a character hiding effect. At this time, it is sufficient if the decision can be made at different rates according to the displayed character, which is the character displayed in the character movement effect. In decision example 002AKD31, the decision rate of "no" not performing a character hiding effect is 80% when the displayed character is any of characters CH01 to CH04, and the decision rate of "yes" performing a character hiding effect is 20%. Also, the decision rate of "no" not performing a character hiding effect is 70% when the displayed character is any of characters CH11 to CH14, and the decision rate of "yes" performing a character hiding effect is 30%.

The display images of characters CH01 to CH04 are applicable when executing a character movement effect in a performance pattern that is the second pattern when there is no inheritance, in which the performance mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of judgment. The display images of characters CH11 to CH14 are applicable when executing a character movement effect in a performance pattern that is the first pattern when there is inheritance, in which the performance mode of the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of judgment. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, the character hiding effect is executed at a higher rate than when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. When the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, if a switching suggestion effect is executed, there is a possibility that the character movement effect will be executed by switching to the first pattern. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the player is likely to expect that the switching suggestion effect will be executed, and the expectation is likely to be increased when the switching suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the character hiding effect can be executed at a low rate, thereby increasing the attention and expectation for the switching suggestion effect, and improving the interest in the game.

The character hiding effect may be executed when a preset hiding permission condition is satisfied, and may not be executed when the hiding permission condition is not satisfied. For example, a limit may be set so that the hiding permission condition is not satisfied and the character hiding effect is not executed in a range where the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2" and a variable display with a two-times previous change is executed. During the execution of a variable display with a two-times previous change corresponding to the count value of the character display counter of "2", a switching suggestion effect may be executed and the first pattern and the second pattern may be switched. In this case, if the character hiding effect is executed simultaneously or overlapping with the switching suggestion effect, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestion effect. Therefore, a limit may be set so that the character hiding effect is not executed simultaneously or overlapping with the switching suggestion effect in a range where the switching suggestion effect can be executed. By restricting the character hiding effect so that it is not executed simultaneously or overlapping with the switching suggestion effect, the player's attention to the switching suggestion effect can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The presence or absence of the character hiding effect may be determined at different determination rates depending on whether the displayed character is one of characters CH01 to CH04. The presence or absence of the character hiding effect may be determined at different determination rates depending on whether the displayed character is one of characters CH11 to CH14. For example, the determination rate may be set so that the character hiding effect is executed at a higher rate when the displayed character is character CH01 or character CH11 than when the displayed character is character CH04 or character CH14. In the character movement effect, the determination rate of the effect pattern may be set so that the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when character CH04 or character CH14 is displayed than when character CH01 or character CH11 is displayed. And, the display of character CH04 or character CH14 does not change to the display of another character in the character movement effect. Therefore, the determination rate may be set so that the rate at which the character hiding effect is executed is lower when the displayed character is a character that is unlikely to change, such as character CH04 or character CH14, than when the displayed character is a character that is likely to change, such as character CH01 or character CH11. In this way, a limit may be set to reduce the rate at which the character hiding effect is executed and the character becomes invisible, in a range where the presentation mode of the character movement effect is a specific mode where it is unlikely to change, compared to when the presentation mode of the character movement effect is other than the specific mode. Alternatively, a limit may be set to prevent the character hiding effect from being executed and the character becoming invisible, in a range where the presentation mode of the character movement effect is a non-changing presentation mode. This increases the player's attention to the change in the presentation mode of the character movement effect when the character hiding effect is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When it is decided to execute a character hiding effect in step AKS043 of the character movement effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the character hiding effect so that it can start by setting the character hiding effect start in step AKS045 in response to the result of the determination in step AKS044 that "character hiding effect is present." For example, in response to the character hiding effect, it reads out an effect control pattern for the character hiding effect that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In response to the control data included in this effect control pattern, it sends an effect execution instruction to the display control unit 123 to perform the hidden display CK01 on the screen of the image display device 5, and starts the execution of the character hiding effect. When the execution of the character hiding effect is started, the hidden effect flag is set to the ON state. Data that identifiably indicates the hidden effect flag can be stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02.

Figure 10-25 (B) shows an example of determining control when a character is hidden 002AKD32. In processing during execution of a character movement performance, control when a character is hidden can be determined in step AKS046. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a character hiding performance at different rates corresponding to a hidden character, which is a character that is hidden in the character hiding performance. As with characters displayed in a character movement performance, a hidden character should be identifiable by using data indicating a performance pattern and data indicating a count value of a character display counter from the data stored in the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02. In decision example 002AKD32, the probability of "continue hiding" continuing the character hiding effect is 30% in response to the fact that the hidden character is one of CH01 to CH04, the probability of "resume display" ending the character hiding effect and resuming the display of the character in the character movement effect is 20%, and the probability of "end display" ending the character display in the character movement effect upon the end of the character hiding effect is 50%. Also, the probability of "continue hiding" continuing the character hiding effect is 20% in response to the fact that the hidden character is one of characters CH11 to CH14, the probability of "resume display" ending the character hiding effect and resuming the display of the character in the character movement effect is 70%, and the probability of "end display" ending the character display in the character movement effect upon the end of the character hiding effect is 10%.

The display images of characters CH01 to CH04 are applicable when executing a character movement performance in a performance pattern that is the second pattern when there is no inheritance, in which the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. The display images of characters CH11 to CH14 are applicable when executing a character movement performance in a performance pattern that is the first pattern when there is inheritance, in which the performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. Therefore, when a character hiding performance is executed and the character becomes invisible while executing a character movement performance in the first pattern, the character hiding performance ends and the display of the character in the character movement performance is resumed at a higher rate than when a character hiding performance is executed and the character becomes invisible while executing a character movement performance in the second pattern. Also, when a character hiding performance is executed and the character becomes invisible while executing a character movement performance in the second pattern, the display of the character in the character movement performance ends together with the end of the character hiding performance at a higher rate than when a character hiding performance is executed and the character becomes invisible while executing a character movement performance in the first pattern. In this way, if a character hiding effect as a special effect is executed and the character becomes invisible after starting execution of a character movement effect as a specific effect in the first pattern, the character movement effect as a specific effect can be resumed. In contrast, if a character hiding effect as a special effect is executed and the character becomes invisible after starting execution of a character movement effect as a special effect in the second pattern, the character movement effect as a specific effect can be ended without being resumed.

When the character hiding control is determined to be "display resumed" in step AKS046 of the character movement performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 performs the character movement performance resume setting in step AKS049 in response to the determination result of step AKS048, thereby terminating the hidden display CK01 in the character hiding performance and controlling the display of the character in the character movement performance to be able to be resumed. For example, the character hiding control may send an instruction to execute a performance prepared in advance in response to "display resume" to the display control unit 123, thereby erasing the hidden display CK01 on the screen of the image display device 5 and resuming the display of the character in the character movement performance. The character to be displayed in the character movement performance may be specified by using the data indicating the performance pattern and the data indicating the count value of the character display counter among the data stored in the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02. In addition, when the execution of the character hiding performance is terminated, the hidden performance flag is cleared to the off state. The character displayed in the character movement performance when the character hiding performance ends may be a different character from the character that became invisible when the character hiding performance was executed after the character movement performance started. For example, when the character hiding performance is executed in response to the start of the variable display that is the third previous change after the character movement performance is started in the performance pattern RPB1-2-3-4 included in the movement performance type RSB shown in FIG. 10-16, the display of the character CH11 becomes invisible. In this case, when the character hiding performance ends in response to the start of the variable display that is the second previous change and the display of the character in the character movement performance is resumed, the display of the character CH12, which is different from the character CH11, is resumed. In this way, when the character hiding performance that is the special performance is executed and becomes invisible after the character movement performance that is the specific performance is started in the first pattern, the character movement performance that is the specific performance in the first pattern with a different performance mode may be resumed.

In addition, the character hiding performance may be controlled so that the performance execution ends when a preset hiding end condition is satisfied, separately from the determination rate of the character hiding control. For example, when the character moving performance is started with a performance pattern included in either the moving performance type RSC or RSD, and the character hiding performance is executed and becomes invisible, in the range where the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2" and a variable display that changes two times back is executed, a limit may be set so that the hiding end condition is satisfied and the execution of the character hiding performance ends. During the execution of the variable display where the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2" and a variable display that changes two times back may be executed, and the first pattern and the second pattern may be switched. In this case, if the character hiding performance is executed simultaneously or overlapping with the switching suggestion performance, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestion performance. Therefore, in the range where the switching suggestion performance is executed and the variable display that switches between the first pattern and the second pattern is executed, a limit may be set so that the character hiding performance is terminated so that it is not executed simultaneously or overlapping. By restricting the character hiding effect so that it is not executed simultaneously or overlapping with the switching suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestion effect and improve the player's interest in the game.

The concealment end condition may be satisfied when the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "1" and a variable display that is one previous change is executed. In this way, when the character hiding effect is executed and the character becomes invisible after the execution of the character movement effect is started, within the range where the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "1" and a variable display that is one previous change is executed, a limit may be set as a limit that the concealment end condition is satisfied and the execution of the character hiding effect is terminated. The variable display that is one previous change that corresponds to the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "1" is a branching point for whether or not to inherit the performance mode of the character movement effect in the first pattern after the next variable display, or not to inherit the performance mode of the character movement effect in the second pattern after the next variable display. In this case, if the character hiding effect is executed and the character movement effect becomes invisible, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the character movement effect. Therefore, a limitation may be set as a limit that ends the character hiding effect so that it is not executed in the range of the variable display that branches into whether the performance mode of the character movement effect is inherited or not. By restricting the character hiding effect from being executed in the variable display that branches into whether the performance mode of the character movement effect is inherited or not, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the character movement effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

When the character hiding control is determined to be "display end" in step AKS046 of the character movement performance execution processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs the character movement performance end setting in step AKS050 in response to the determination result of step AKS048, thereby ending the hidden display CK01 in the character hiding performance and controlling the display of the character in the character movement performance to be able to end. For example, the character hiding control may send a performance end instruction prepared in advance in response to "display end" to the display control unit 123, thereby erasing the hidden display CK01 on the screen of the image display device 5 and erasing the display of the character in the character movement performance. When the character hiding performance and the character movement performance execution are ended, the stored data in the character movement performance data storage unit 002AKM02 may be cleared and initialized.

Figure 10-25 (C) shows a determination example 002AKD33 regarding whether or not to perform a switching suggestion effect. In the processing during execution of the character movement effect, the presence or absence of a switching suggestion effect can be determined in step AKS051. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a switching suggestion effect at different rates corresponding to the displayed character, which is the character displayed in the character movement effect. In determination example 002AKD33, the determination rate of "no" not performing a switching suggestion effect is 90% corresponding to the displayed character being character CH01, and the determination rate of "yes" performing a switching suggestion effect is 10%. The determination rate of "no" not performing a switching suggestion effect is 85% corresponding to the displayed character being character CH02, and the determination rate of "yes" performing a switching suggestion effect is 15%. The determination rate of "no" not performing a switching suggestion effect is 75% corresponding to the displayed character being character CH03, and the determination rate of "yes" performing a switching suggestion effect is 25%. Corresponding to the character CH04 being displayed, the decision rate for "No" not executing the switching suggestion effect is 60%, and the decision rate for "Yes" executing the switching suggestion effect is 40%.

In addition, in response to the fact that the displayed character is one of the characters CH11 to CH14, it may be determined to be "none" which does not execute the switching suggestion effect. The display images of the characters CH01 to CH04 are applicable when executing the character movement effect in the effect pattern which is the second pattern when there is no inheritance, in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display which is the subject of the judgment. The display images of the characters CH11 to CH14 are applicable when executing the character movement effect in the effect pattern which is the first pattern when there is inheritance, in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display which is the subject of the judgment. Therefore, by executing the switching suggestion effect at a predetermined rate when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, it is possible to suggest that it can be switched to the first pattern. When the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, if the switching suggestion effect is executed, there is a possibility that the character movement effect will be switched to the first pattern and executed. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the player is likely to expect that the switching suggestion effect will be executed, and the sense of expectation is likely to be increased when the switching suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, the switch suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined rate, which can increase attention and anticipation towards the switch suggestion effect and improve interest in the game.

The switch suggestion effect may be executable when a preset switch suggestion condition is met. For example, in the range where the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2" and a variable display with two previous changes is executed, the switch suggestion condition may be met and the switch suggestion effect may be executable. During the execution of a variable display with two previous changes, where the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2", the first pattern and the second pattern may be switched. In this case, executing the switch suggestion effect can increase the player's attention to the switching of the presentation mode in the character movement presentation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The switching suggestion condition may be satisfied when, after starting the execution of a character movement effect with a performance pattern included in either of the movement performance types RSC and RSD, the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2" and a variable display with a two-times previous change is executed. After starting the execution of a character movement effect with a performance pattern included in either of the movement performance types RSC and RSD, during the execution of a variable display with a two-times previous change corresponding to the count value of the character display counter of "2", the first pattern and the second pattern are switched. In this case, by executing the switching suggestion effect, the player's attention to the switching of the performance mode in the character movement effect can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved. In contrast, when, after starting the execution of a character movement effect with a performance pattern included in either of the movement performance types RSA and RSB, the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2" and a variable display with a two-times previous change is executed, the switching suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined rate, for example, by determining the presence or absence of the switching suggestion effect with a determination rate such as the determination example 002AKD33. In this way, when the first pattern and the second pattern can be switched after the execution of the character movement effect has started, the switching suggestion effect can always be executed, and when the first pattern and the second pattern cannot be switched, the switching suggestion effect may or may not be executed at a predetermined rate. This increases the player's interest in whether the character movement effect can be switched in the display mode when the switching suggestion effect is executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Figure 10-26 is a flow chart showing an example of timer performance execution processing. The timer performance execution processing is included in the processing that can be called from the look-ahead performance setting processing shown in Figure 10-11, and can be executed in step AKS010 after the character movement performance execution processing in step AKS009 is executed. When the performance control CPU 120 executes the timer performance execution processing, it determines whether the timer performance flag is on (step AKS061). If the timer performance flag is off (step AKS061; No), the timer performance execution processing ends, corresponding to the fact that neither the timer performance nor the timer standby performance is being executed.

If the timer performance flag is on in response to step AKS061 (step AKS061; Yes), it is determined whether or not the timer performance target change has started (step AKS062). Step AKS062 updates the count value of the remaining number counter stored in the timer performance data storage unit 002AKM03, for example, by subtracting 1. At this time, if the count value of the remaining number counter after the update is "0", it is determined that the timer performance target change has started. In contrast, if the count value of the remaining number counter after the update is other than "0", it is determined that the timer performance target change has not started.

If the timer performance target change has started in response to step AKS062 (step AKS062; Yes), the timer performance execution setting is performed (step AKS063), and the timer performance execution processing ends.

If the timer performance target change has not started in response to step AKS062 (step AKS062; No), the timer standby performance is set to in progress (step AKS064), and the timer performance in progress processing ends.

Figure 10-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance pattern change start processing. The performance pattern change start processing is included in the processing that can be called from the performance control process processing S_CPROC shown in Figure 9 (A), and can be executed in step S155 when the performance control process code loaded in step S153 is 01 [H]. When the performance pattern change start processing is executed, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc. (step ASK101). The performance control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents, such as the variable pattern indicated in the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command. The variable pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the variable pattern setting process included in the special pattern normal processing P_TNORMAL corresponding to the special pattern process code 00 [H] is executed in step S112 of the special pattern process processing shown in FIG. 6, and the command transmission setting is performed at the start of the special pattern variation. The variable pattern designation command is a performance control command that designates the variable pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a performance control command that designates the variable display result determined using the random number MR1-1 for determining the special pattern and the random number MR2-1 for the winning pattern. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variable pattern and the variable display result may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability change (jackpot)", and "probability change (jackpot)".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", different (mismatched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left" and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5R. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)", the same (matched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left" and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In this case, the center confirmed performance pattern displayed as stopped in the "center" performance pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 among the confirmed performance patterns is determined as a performance pattern different from the confirmed performance patterns on the left and right. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)" or "probability change (jackpot)", the same (matched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left", "center", and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. At this time, it is only necessary to determine whether the fixed performance pattern is a normal pattern (e.g., a performance pattern showing an even number) or a performance pattern showing a probability variable (e.g., a performance pattern showing an odd number) depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probability variable (jackpot)" and whether the promotion performance during the jackpot is executed or not. The promotion performance during the jackpot is a performance in which a combination of performance patterns (non-probability variable jackpot combination) that reminds one of a jackpot but does not remind one of a probability variable state is temporarily displayed on the image display device 5, and then whether or not the probability variable state will be entered during the jackpot game state or at the end of the jackpot game state is notified. When the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)", a fixed performance pattern is determined from among multiple types of normal patterns. Also, when the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)" and it is determined that the promotion performance during the jackpot is not executed, a fixed performance pattern is determined from among multiple types of probability variable patterns. In contrast, when it is decided to execute the jackpot promotion effect even if the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the fixed effect pattern is selected from among a number of types of normal patterns. This prevents the jackpot promotion effect from being executed even if the fixed effect pattern is derived and displayed in a line of probability change patterns, and thus prevents the player from feeling suspicious.

If the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probability variable (jackpot)", a decision may be made as to whether or not to execute a probability variable promotion performance such as a re-lottery performance or a jackpot promotion performance. In the re-lottery performance, if the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probability variable (jackpot)", a decision may be made as to whether or not to execute a probability variable promotion performance such as a re-lottery performance or a jackpot promotion performance. In the re-lottery performance, the performance pattern of a non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal pattern is displayed once during the variable display of the performance pattern, making it difficult or impossible to recognize that the game is being controlled to the probability variable state, and the performance pattern is displayed again (re-varied) to display the performance pattern of the probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same probability variable pattern in a stopped state, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the game is being controlled to the probability variable state. Note that there are also cases where the performance pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the performance pattern is re-varied in the re-lottery performance, and thus the game is not notified that the game is being controlled to the probability variable state. When it is decided to execute a re-lottery performance, the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped before the execution of the re-lottery performance is determined, and temporarily made difficult or impossible to recognize, and the performance symbols are again variably displayed (re-varied) to display the performance symbols of the same probability variable jackpot combination as a static display, thereby enabling the player to recognize that the game will be controlled to the probability variable state. Note that there are also cases where the performance symbols of a non-probability variable jackpot combination are displayed as a static display after the performance symbols are re-varied in the re-lottery performance, thereby notifying the player that the game will be controlled to the probability variable state. When it is decided to execute a re-lottery performance, the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped before the execution of the re-lottery performance can be determined.

After determining the final stop symbol etc. in step AKS101, it is determined whether or not to perform an active display change effect (step AKS102). At this time, it is determined whether or not to perform an active display change effect, i.e. "no active display change effect", in which the active display change effect is not performed, or "active display change effect", in which the active display change effect is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not this determination result is "active display change effect" (step AKS103). If "active display change effect" is performed (step AKS103; Yes), a pattern for the active display change effect is determined (step AKS104).

If the result of step AKS103 is "no active display change effect" rather than "yes active display change effect" (step AKS103; No), after determining the pattern for the active display change effect in step AKS104, it is determined whether or not "super reach" is present, in which a reach effect that will result in a super reach will be executed (step AKS105). Whether or not a reach effect that will result in a super reach will be executed can be determined according to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. In step AKS105, it is determined whether the result is "super reach" in which a reach effect that will result in a super reach will be executed, or "no super reach" in which a reach effect that will result in a super reach will not be executed. Then, if the result is "super reach" (step AKS105; Yes), the post-reach effect is determined (step AKS106).

In the case where "super reach is not available" but "super reach is not available" in response to step AKS105 (step AKS105; No), after the reach post performance is determined in step AKS106, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step AKS107). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple performance control patterns prepared as a special chart change performance control pattern in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may select one of the multiple performance control patterns prepared as an active display change performance control pattern in response to the determination result of the active display change performance pattern in step AKS104, and set it as the usage pattern. In response to the determination result of the reach post performance in step AKS106, one of the multiple performance control patterns prepared as a reach post performance control pattern may be selected and set as the usage pattern. In addition, separate performance control patterns may be set as performance control patterns for special chart change, active display change performance control patterns, post-reach performance control patterns, and other various performances, or a single performance control pattern may be set that corresponds to a combination of execution settings for each performance.

When the performance control pattern is determined by step AKS107, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area, such as the performance control timer setting unit of RAM 122, is set in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command (step AKS108). Then, settings are made to start the variation of the performance pattern, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS109). At this time, the variation of the performance pattern can be started in each of the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying the display list or individual drawing commands specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern, such as the performance control pattern at the time of special pattern variation determined by step AKS107, to the VDP of the display control unit 123. After that, the value of the performance control process code is updated to 02 [H], which is a value corresponding to the processing during the performance pattern variation (step AKS110), and the performance pattern variation start processing is completed.

Figure 10-28 (A) shows a determination example 002AKD51 regarding whether or not to perform an active display change performance. In the performance pattern change start process, the presence or absence of an active display change performance can be determined in step AKS104. At this time, it is sufficient if the presence or absence of an active display change performance can be determined at different rates corresponding to the variable display content. In the determination example 002AKD51, the determination rate of "no" not performing an active display change performance is 99% in response to the variable display content being "non-reach (miss)", and the determination rate of "yes" performing an active display change performance is 1%. The determination rate of "no" not performing an active display change performance is 50% in response to the variable display content being "reach (miss)", and the determination rate of "yes" performing an active display change performance is 50%. The determination rate of "no" not performing an active display change performance is 25% in response to the variable display content being "non-probability change (jackpot)", and the determination rate of "yes" performing an active display change performance is 75%. Corresponding to the variable display content being "probable change (jackpot)", the probability of "no" not executing the active display change presentation is 20%, and the probability of "yes" executing the active display change presentation is 80%. With such settings, when the active display change presentation is executed, the player is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player than when the active display change presentation is not executed. In addition, any setting may be used to increase the probability of control to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player than when the active display change presentation is not executed. In this way, the active display change presentation included in the change presentation can be appropriately executed so as to increase the player's attention to the execution of the active display change presentation, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Figure 10-28 (B) shows an example 002AKD52 of determining a performance pattern that will become an active display change performance pattern. In this embodiment, four performance patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 are prepared in advance as multiple performance patterns that can be determined as active display change performance patterns. The number of performance patterns that can be determined as active display change performance patterns may be multiple patterns based on any design. The performance aspects of the active display change performance are set to differ depending on the performance patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2.

Figure 10-28 (C) shows an example of the configuration of performance patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 that can be determined as patterns for active display change performance. The pre-change display corresponding to each performance pattern shows the display mode of the active display displayed before the active display change performance is executed. Performance patterns YAP1-1 and YAP1-2 correspond to a performance mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed once in the active display change performance. Performance patterns YAP2-1 and YAP2-2 correspond to a performance mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed twice in the active display change performance. Performance pattern YAP1-1 sets the final display mode of the active display to display image AKE11 that notifies the message "?", performance patterns YAP1-2 and YAP2-1 set the final display mode of the active display to display image AKE12 that notifies the message "Chance", and performance pattern YAP2-2 sets the final display mode of the active display to display image AKE13 that notifies the message "Super Hot".

In the determination example 002AKD52 of FIG. 10-28 (B), it is sufficient if different presentation patterns can be determined in response to the variable display content being "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability change (jackpot)", and "probability change (jackpot)". Also, presentation patterns may be determined at different rates in response to the variable display content. For example, when the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", the determination rate of presentation pattern YAP1-1 as the active display change presentation pattern is 100%, and the determination rates of presentation patterns YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 are 0%. Therefore, when the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", presentation pattern YAP1-1 is determined as the active display change presentation pattern, and presentation patterns YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 are not determined. In this way, in the range where the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)" and is the most disadvantageous variable display content for the player among the cases where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, a restriction is set as a limit that the active display change presentation can be executed in the first presentation pattern but not in the second presentation pattern. Also, if the variable display content is "reach (miss)", the presentation patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1 can be determined as active display change presentation patterns, and the presentation pattern YAP2-2 cannot be determined. In this way, in the range where the variable display content is "reach (miss)", a restriction is set as a limit that the active display change presentation is not executed in the third presentation pattern. When the variable display content is disadvantageous to the player, by restricting the active display change presentation from being executed in the second presentation pattern or the third presentation pattern, the active display change presentation can be appropriately executed so that the player's expectations, which were raised by the active display change presentation, are not likely to decrease, thereby improving the game interest.

In the determination example 002AKD52 of FIG. 10-28(B), for example, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," presentation pattern YAP2-2 is determined as the active display change presentation pattern with a higher determination rate than when the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," "reach (miss)," or "non-probability change (jackpot)." Also, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the determination rate of presentation pattern YAP2-2 is higher than the determination rates of the other presentation patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," presentation pattern YAP2-2 is determined with a lower determination rate than when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," and with the same determination rate of 30% as presentation patterns YAP1-2 and YAP2-1. With this setting, when an active display change effect is executed with the effect pattern YAP2-2, the expectation of being controlled to a special state that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state is higher than when an active display change effect is executed with any of the effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1. In addition, with any setting, when an active display change effect is executed with the effect pattern YAP2-2, the expectation of being controlled to a special state that is advantageous to the player and different from the advantageous state is higher than when an active display change effect is executed with any of the effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1.

Figure 10-29 (A) shows an example 002AKD61 of determining a post-reach performance. In the performance pattern change start process, the post-reach performance can be determined in step AKS106. At this time, it is sufficient if the post-reach performance can be determined at different rates corresponding to the variable display result. For example, when the variable display result is a "miss," the determination rate of the background display performance is 50%, the determination rate of the step-up performance is 30%, and the determination rate of the story performance is 20%. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determination rate of the background display performance is 20%, the determination rate of the step-up performance is 30%, and the determination rate of the story performance is 50%. With such settings, when a story performance is executed as the reach-after performance, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than when a background display performance or a step-up performance is executed, and when a step-up performance is executed as the reach-after performance, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than when a background display performance is executed. In addition, with any settings, when a story performance is executed as the reach-after performance, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than when a background display performance or a step-up performance is executed, and when a step-up performance is executed as the reach-after performance, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is higher than when a background display performance is executed. In this way, by making the jackpot expectation level different depending on the execution content of the reach-after performance, the reach-after performance can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the reach-after performance is increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 10-29 (B) shows a determination example 002AKD62 of a pattern transparency pattern. In this embodiment, three pattern transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3 are prepared in advance as multiple transition patterns that can be displayed by transmitting the performance pattern that serves as identification information. The number of transition patterns that can be displayed by transmitting the performance pattern may be multiple patterns based on any design. In the performance pattern change start process, when the post-reach performance is determined in step AKS106, it is sufficient that a corresponding pattern transparency pattern can be determined. In the determination example 002AKD62, different pattern transparency patterns can be determined in accordance with the post-reach performance. For example, when the post-reach performance is a background display performance, a pattern transparency pattern TSP1 is determined. When the post-reach performance is a step-up performance, a pattern transparency pattern TSP2 is determined. When the post-reach performance is a story performance, a pattern transparency pattern TSP3 is determined. The transparent pattern TSP1 to TSP3 have different settings of transparency when the effect pattern is displayed transparently. The background display effect can suggest the degree of expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state, by displaying one of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 that become the background image when the effect pattern is made transparent according to the transparent pattern TSP1. The step-up effect can suggest the degree of expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state, by displaying the display images AKG1 to AKG4 that can be changed according to the number of steps when the effect pattern is made transparent according to the transparent pattern TSP2. The story effect can suggest the degree of expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state, by displaying the display images AKH11 to AKH44 in accordance with the content of the progression of a series of stories when the effect pattern is made transparent according to the transparent pattern TSP3.

Figure 10-30 shows an example of the configuration of the performance control pattern. In the performance pattern change start process, the performance control pattern can be determined in step AKS107. For example, the performance control pattern that becomes the performance control pattern during special pattern change is configured to include control data used to control the execution of various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of the performance pattern, corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern designation command. The control data that constitutes the performance control data can be set as process data that includes the performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, and end code, divided into multiple blocks. The performance control process timer judgment value is a judgment value that is compared with the performance control process timer value. The performance control process timer value is the clock value of the performance control process timer. Note that instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, data indicating the switching timing of the performance control, etc., may be set in response to a specified control content or processing content, such as, for example, receiving a specified performance control command from the main board 11 or executing a specified processing as a processing for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the display mode of each performance pattern during the variable display of the performance pattern. In other words, the display control data is data that specifies the display control of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects linked to the variable display of the performance pattern. In other words, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output control from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the light emission drive mode for light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. In other words, the lamp control data is data that specifies the light emission mode control of the light-emitting body. The operation detection control data includes data indicating the effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's actions, such as the tilt operation on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, the instruction operation on the trigger button, or the press operation on the push button 31B, and data specifying the control content of the performance mode when each action is effectively detected, indicating the performance mode control according to the detection of the player's action. The vibration control data includes data indicating the on-period and drive mode of the vibration motor that vibrates the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In other words, the vibration control data is data that specifies the vibration mode control of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all performance control patterns, and there may be performance control patterns that include some of the control data depending on the content of the performance action by each performance control pattern. Furthermore, for multiple types of process data included in a performance control pattern, the type of control data that makes up each process data may differ depending on the content of the performance action executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data that includes all of the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and there may be process data that includes some of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as movable body control data that indicates the operating state of the movable body 32.

Figure 10-31 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during the change of the performance pattern. The processing during the change of the performance pattern is included in the processing that can be called from the performance control process processing S_CPROC shown in Figure 9 (A), and can be executed in step S155 when the performance control process code loaded in step S153 is 02 [H]. When the processing during the change of the performance pattern is executed, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the special pattern change time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the change pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step AKS121). At this time, the timer value of the performance control process timer is updated, for example by subtracting 1, and it is judged that the variable display time has elapsed when an end code is read out from the performance control pattern corresponding to the updated performance control process timer value.

If the variable display period has not elapsed corresponding to step AKS121 (step AKS121; No), it is determined whether or not it is a character movement presentation period (step AKS122). The character movement presentation period may be predetermined, for example, in the presentation control pattern for the character movement presentation. If it is a character movement presentation period (step AKS122; Yes), character movement presentation control is performed (step AKS123). This allows the character movement presentation to be a specific presentation to be executed before the variable display that is the subject of the determination. In addition, after the variable display that is the subject of the determination, the presentation mode of the character movement presentation to be a specific presentation can be inherited and executed. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is the character movement presentation end timing (step AKS124). The character movement presentation end timing may be, for example, the timing when a presentation end condition set in advance in the presentation control pattern for the character movement presentation is established. If it is the character movement presentation end timing (step AKS124; Yes), character movement presentation end control is performed (step AKS125). As a result, when a character movement performance is executed in the first pattern, it is possible to end the performance after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment by inheriting the performance mode of the character movement performance. Also, when a character movement performance is executed in the second pattern, it is possible to end the performance after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment without inheriting the performance mode of the character movement performance.

If it is not the character movement performance period corresponding to step ASK122 (step AKS122; No), if it is not the character movement performance end timing corresponding to step AKS124 (step AKS124; No), or after executing the control by step ASK125, it is determined whether it is the timer-related performance period (step AKS126). The timer-related performance period may be a period during which a timer performance or a timer standby performance can be executed, for example, in a performance control pattern for a timer performance. If it is the timer-related performance period (step AKS126; Yes), timer-related performance control is performed (step AKS127). This makes it possible to execute a timer standby performance including a specific display corresponding to the variable display before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. In addition, in the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, it is possible to execute a timer performance including a specific display corresponding to the variable display. At this time, it is determined whether it is the timer performance end timing (step AKS128). The timer performance end timing may be, for example, a timing when a performance end condition set in advance in a performance control pattern for a timer performance is established. If it is time for the timer effect to end (step AKS128; Yes), timer effect end control is performed (step AKS129). This makes it possible to end the timer effect after displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of the determination for a short or long period of time.

If it is not a timer-related performance period corresponding to step AKS126 (step AKS126; No), if it is not the timer performance end timing in step AKS128 (step AKS128; No), or after the control by step AKS129, it is determined whether it is an active display change performance period (step AKS130). The active display change performance period may be a period during which an active display change performance can be executed, for example, in a performance control pattern for active display change performance. If it is an active display change performance period (step AKS130; Yes), active display change performance control is performed (step AKS131). This makes it possible to execute a change performance in which the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display, is changed from the first mode to the second mode, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the first mode. In addition, the control of step AKS131 includes a control that enables a history suggestion performance to be executed. For example, when changing the display mode of the active display by an active display change effect, which is a change effect, it is sufficient that a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first state before the change can be executed after the active display change effect has started.

If it is not the active display change presentation period in step AKS130 (step AKS130; No), after the control in step AKS131, it is determined whether it is the reach presentation period (step AKS132). The reach presentation period may be a period during which special presentations such as reach presentations that result in normal reaches, post-reach presentations, reach development presentations, and reach presentations that result in super reaches can be executed, and may be determined in advance, for example, in the presentation control pattern during special chart changes. If it is the reach presentation period (step AKS132; Yes), reach presentation control is performed (step AKS133).

The reach effect control of step AKS133 may include a pattern transparency control that allows the effect patterns that serve as identification information that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, such as the "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to be transparently displayed. In this case, for example, during a specific period in which a post-reach effect is executed, the effect patterns that serve as identification information are made transparent and displayable according to a pattern transparency pattern that serves as a transition pattern. In addition, when the effect patterns are made transparent, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state can be suggested by displaying effect images that serve as special images in the post-reach effect, such as background display effects, step-up effects, and story effects.

When the symbol transparency control is executed as the reach effect control of step AKS133, a special effect may be executed in which the effect symbol serving as identification information is displayed transparently according to a symbol transparency pattern serving as a different transition pattern. In this case, the special effect may include, for example, a first special effect capable of displaying the effect symbol serving as identification information at a first transparency from the start to the end of the specific period in which the reach effect is executed, and a second special effect capable of displaying the effect symbol serving as identification information corresponding to the start of the specific period at a second transparency lower than the first transparency, and displaying the effect symbol serving as identification information corresponding to the end of the specific period at a third transparency higher than the first transparency. The determination rate of the special effect may be set so that the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the second special effect is executed than when the first special effect is executed.

The reach effect control of step AKS133 may include switching effect control when a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed. In this case, as suggestive effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, a first character display effect included in the first effect and a second character display effect included in the second effect that is switched to after the first effect is executed can be executed. Then, a first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect, such as a first character introduction effect, and a second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect, such as a second character introduction effect, can be executed. As execution control of corresponding effects including such a first corresponding effect and a second corresponding effect, a second corresponding effect can be executed during execution of the first effect before switching from the first effect to the second effect.

If it is not the reach performance period according to step AKS132 (step AKS132; No), after the control by step AKS133, control is performed to execute any performance during other variable display, including variable display control of the performance pattern, based on, for example, the setting of control data in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern (step AKS134), and the processing during the variation of the performance pattern is terminated.

When the variable display time has elapsed corresponding to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS135). When the pattern determination command has not been received (step AKS135; No), the process during the change in the performance pattern ends and waits. Note that after the variable display time has elapsed, it may be determined that the pattern determination command was not received properly corresponding to the passage of a predetermined time without receiving the pattern determination command, and a predetermined error process may be executed. When the pattern determination command has been received (step AKS135; Yes), for example, the performance control CPU 120 supplies a drawing command corresponding to the pattern determination to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby controlling the display of the final stop pattern that is the display result in the variable display of the performance pattern to be stopped (step AKS136). As a result, the variable display result of the performance pattern that is the determined performance pattern is derived and displayed.

Following the control by step AKS136, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the winning start command (step AKS137). The waiting time for receiving the winning start command is used as the waiting time in the performance pattern change stop processing executed in step S155 when the performance control process code loaded by step S153 of the performance control process processing S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9 (A) is 03 [H]. In addition, the performance control process code is updated to 03 [H], which is a value corresponding to the performance pattern change stop processing (step AKS138), and the performance pattern change processing ends.

Figures 10-32 to 10-36 show examples of performance execution when a character movement performance is executed. Among these, Figure 10-32 shows an example of performance execution when the execution of a character movement performance is started based on the occurrence of a start winning. The character movement performance can be executed when a start winning occurs based on the determination result by step AKS022 of the character movement performance determination process shown in Figure 10-13. In the performance execution example 002AK101 shown in Figure 10-32 (A), a variable display of the performance pattern is executed, and when the performance patterns are changing in the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", a reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory number "2" is performed in the reserved memory area AKB0. At this time, as shown in Figure 10-32 (B), a start winning occurs at the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A by the game ball passing through the first starting area. Based on the occurrence of such a start winning, step AKS022 of the character movement performance decision process determines that "character movement performance is on" to execute the character movement performance. In addition, in response to the occurrence of a start winning, the number of pending memories is updated to "3", so the variable display being executed is executed three times before the variable display that was the subject of the judgment. Therefore, the variable display in performance execution example 002AK101 is the three times before change.

Based on the result of the determination in step AKS022, the movement effect type is determined in step AKS024, and the effect pattern to be used for the character movement effect is determined in step AKS025. Next, the character movement effect is started by setting the character movement effect start in step AKS026. For example, when an effect pattern that displays character CH01 in a variable display that changes three times back, such as any of effect patterns RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-4-4, out of the multiple effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA shown in Figure 15, is determined, the character movement effect is started by displaying character CH01, as in effect execution example 002AK102 shown in Figure 10-32 (C1). In addition, when a performance pattern that displays character CH11 in a variable display that changes three times back, such as one of performance patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-4-4-4, among the multiple performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSB shown in FIG. 16, is determined, the character movement performance is started by displaying character CH11, such as the performance execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C2). In the case of the movement performance type RSC, a performance pattern that displays character CH11 in a variable display that changes three times back, such as one of performance patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-4-4, among the multiple change patterns shown in FIG. 17, can be determined. In the case of the movement performance type RSD, a performance pattern that displays character CH01 in a variable display that changes three times back, such as one of performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-4-4-4, among the multiple performance patterns shown in FIG. 18, can be determined.

While a character movement effect is being executed, step AKS051 can determine whether or not to execute a switch suggestion effect, based on the fact that the character movement effect flag is determined to be on in step AKS041 of the character movement effect execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24. For example, in the case of movement effect type RSA, in response to the execution of a variable display that changes two times back, the decision as to whether or not to execute a switch suggestion effect may be made at a decision rate corresponding to the displayed character, such as decision example 002AKD33 shown in FIG. 10-25(C). Also, in the case of movement effect type RSD, in response to the execution of a variable display that changes two times back, it may be decided that a switch suggestion effect is always executed.

Figure 10-33 shows an example of the performance execution in the case where a character movement performance, etc., following the performance execution example 002AK102 shown in Figure 10-32 (C1) is executed. Figures 10-33 (A) and 10-33 (B) show examples of the performance execution in the case where a variable display that is a three-times-ago change in performance execution example 002AK102 is completed, and then a variable display that is a two-times-ago change is executed, in which a switching suggestion performance or a character hiding performance is not executed. In the performance execution example 002AK111 shown in Figure 10-33 (A), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern that displays the same character CH01 as the three-times-ago change in performance execution example 002AK102 in a variable display that is a two-times-ago change. In the performance execution example 002AK112 shown in Figure 10-33 (B), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern that displays a character CH02 different from the three-times-ago change in performance execution example 002AK102 in a variable display that is a two-times-ago change. Any other effect image that clearly indicates the reached display position may be displayed. In the case of the movement effect type RSA, if any of the effect patterns RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4 shown in FIG. 10-15 is used, it is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the same character CH01 as in the 3rd previous change is displayed in the 2nd previous change, as in effect execution example 002AK111. Also, in the case of the movement effect type RSA, if any of the effect patterns RPA1-2-2 to RPA1-2-4 shown in FIG. 10-15 is used, it is possible to execute a character movement effect in which a character CH02 different from the character CH01 of the 3rd previous change is displayed in the 2nd previous change, as in effect execution example 002AK112.

Figure 10-33 (C) shows a performance execution example 002AK113 in which a switching suggestion performance is executed, among cases in which a variable display with a two-times previous change is executed following the end of the variable display with a three-times previous change in performance execution example 002AK102 shown in Figure 10-32 (C1). In this performance execution example 002AK113, a switching suggestion performance is executed using a display image that forms the effect display CJ01.

The switching suggestion performance may be executable in any of a plurality of types of performance modes. When it is decided to execute the switching suggestion performance by step AKS051 of the character movement performance execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, the performance pattern to be the switching suggestion performance pattern may be determined to be any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In this case, the performance pattern to be the switching suggestion performance pattern may be determined with a different decision rate corresponding to the performance pattern to be the character movement performance pattern. For example, the decision rate may be set so that the first suggestion performance pattern that can be determined to be the switching suggestion performance pattern with a high decision rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD is the character movement performance pattern can be determined to be the switching suggestion performance pattern with a low decision rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA is the character movement performance pattern. Also, the decision rate may be set so that the second suggestion performance pattern that can be determined to be the switching suggestion performance pattern with a low decision rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD is the character movement performance pattern can be determined to be the switching suggestion performance pattern with a high decision rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA is the character movement performance pattern. With this setting, when a switching suggestion effect is executed with the first suggestion effect pattern, the character movement effect as a specific effect that started to be executed with the second pattern is switched to the first pattern and executed at a higher rate than when a switching suggestion effect is executed with the second suggestion effect pattern. In this way, it may be possible to switch the character movement effect from the second pattern to the first pattern at different rates depending on which of multiple effect modes the switching suggestion effect is.

While a character movement effect is being executed, step AKS043 can determine whether or not to execute a character hiding effect, based on the fact that step AKS041 of the character movement effect execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24 has determined that the character movement effect flag is on. In this case, the presence or absence of a character hiding effect may be determined with a determination rate corresponding to the displayed character, such as determination example 002AK31 shown in FIG. 10-25(A).

Figure 10-33 (D) shows a performance execution example 002AK114 in which a character hiding performance is executed, among cases in which a variable display that changes three times back is executed following the end of the variable display that changes three times back in performance execution example 002AK102 shown in Figure 10-32 (C1). In this performance execution example 002AK114, a character hiding performance is executed using a performance image that forms the hidden display CK01.

The character hiding effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of different performance modes. When it is decided to execute a character hiding effect by step AKS043 of the character movement effect execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, the performance pattern to be the hiding effect pattern may be determined to be any one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In this case, the performance pattern to be the hiding effect pattern may be determined with a different determination rate corresponding to the performance pattern to be the character movement effect pattern. For example, the determination rate may be set so that the first hidden display pattern that can be determined to be the hiding effect pattern with a high determination rate when the performance pattern included in the movement effect type RSB is the character movement effect pattern can be determined to be the hiding effect pattern with a low determination rate when the performance pattern included in the movement effect type RSA is the character movement effect pattern. In addition, the second concealed display pattern that can be determined to be a concealed display pattern with a low probability when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB is a character movement performance pattern may have a determination rate set so that it can be determined to be a concealed display pattern with a high probability when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA is a character movement performance pattern.

The character hiding effect may be executed in response to any one of a number of timings, such as the start of the variable display, when the variable display is being executed, and when the variable display is being ended. When it is decided to execute a character hiding effect in step AKS043 of the character movement effect execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, the execution timing of the character hiding effect may be determined to be any one of a number of timings. The execution timing of the character hiding effect may be determined to be any one of a number of timings at different rates, depending on whether or not the character displayed in the character movement effect changes. With such settings, when the character hiding effect is executed at the first timing, it may be possible to resume a character movement effect with a different presentation mode at a higher rate than when the character hiding effect is executed at the second timing.

In step AKS046 of the character movement effect execution process shown in FIG. 10-24, as in the determination example 002AKD32 shown in FIG. 10-25(B), if the hidden character is any of the characters CH01 to CH04, "display end" is determined with a high probability, and if the hidden character is any of the characters CH11 to CH14, "display resume" is determined with a high probability. With such settings, if the character movement effect as a specific effect is started in the first pattern and then the character hiding effect as a special effect is executed in the first hidden display pattern and becomes invisible, the character movement effect can be resumed in the first pattern with a high probability, and if the character hiding effect as a special effect is executed in the second hidden display pattern and becomes invisible after the character movement effect as a specific effect is started in the second pattern, the character movement effect can be resumed with a low probability and can be ended without resuming the character movement effect with a high probability. In this way, the character movement effect may be resumed at different rates depending on which of the multiple effect modes the character hiding effect is.

Figures 10-33 (E) and 10-33 (F) show examples of performance execution in which a character movement performance in a variable display that changes two times is executed following the execution of a switch suggestion performance in performance execution example 002AK113. In performance execution example 002AK115 shown in Figure 10-33 (E), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which the same character CH01 is displayed without switching as before the switch suggestion performance is executed. In performance execution example 002AK116 shown in Figure 10-33 (F), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which a character CH11 different from that displayed before the switch suggestion performance is executed is displayed. In the case of the movement performance type RSA, if it is any of RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4 shown in Figure 10-15, even if a switch suggestion performance such as performance execution example 002AK113 is executed, it is possible to execute a character movement performance as in performance execution example 002AK115 without switching the display of character CH01. In contrast, in the case of the movement effect type RSD, if it is any of the effect patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-4-4 shown in FIG. 10-18, it is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the display switches from character CH01 to character CH11 as in effect execution example 002AK116 by executing a switch suggestion effect such as effect execution example 002AK113. Therefore, when a switch suggestion effect such as effect execution example 002AK113 is executed and the character display is not switched, it is possible to continue to execute a character movement effect that becomes a specific effect in the effect pattern that becomes the second pattern such as effect execution example 002AK115. In contrast, when a switch suggestion effect such as effect execution example 002AK113 is executed and the character display is switched, it is possible to execute a character movement effect that becomes a specific effect in the effect pattern that becomes the first pattern such as effect execution example 002AK116.

Figure 10-34 shows an example of the performance execution in the case where a character movement performance, etc., following the performance execution example 002AK103 shown in Figure 10-32 (C2) is executed. Figures 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B) show examples of the performance execution in the case where a variable display that is a three-times-ago change in performance execution example 002AK103 is completed, and then a variable display that is a two-times-ago change is executed, in which a switching suggestion performance or a character hiding performance is not executed. In the performance execution example 002AK121 shown in Figure 10-34 (A), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern that displays the same character CH11 as the three-times-ago change in performance execution example 002AK103 in a variable display that is a two-times-ago change. In the performance execution example 002AK122 shown in Figure 10-34 (B), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern that displays a character CH12 different from the three-times-ago change in performance execution example 002AK103 in a variable display that is a two-times-ago change. Any other effect image that clearly indicates the reached display position may be displayed. In the case of the movement effect type RSB, if any of the effect patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-4-4 shown in FIG. 10-16 is used, it is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the same character CH11 as in the 3rd previous change is displayed in the 2nd previous change, as in the effect execution example 002AK121. In addition, in the case of the movement effect type RSB, if any of the effect patterns RPB1-2-2-2 to RPB1-2-4-4 shown in FIG. 10-16 is used, it is possible to execute a character movement effect in which a character CH12 different from the character CH11 of the 3rd previous change is displayed in the 2nd previous change, as in the effect execution example 002AK122.

Figure 10-34 (C) shows a performance execution example 002AK123 in which a switching suggestion performance is executed, among cases in which a variable display with a two-times previous change is executed following the end of the variable display with a three-times previous change in performance execution example 002AK103 shown in Figure 10-32 (C2). In this performance execution example 002AK123, a switching suggestion performance is executed using a display image that forms the effect display CJ01.

The switching suggestion performance may be executed in any of a plurality of types of performance modes. As in the case of the performance execution example 002AK113 shown in FIG. 10-33(C), when it is decided to execute the switching suggestion performance by step AKS051 of the character movement performance execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, the performance pattern to be the switching suggestion performance pattern may be determined to be any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In this case, the performance pattern to be the switching suggestion performance pattern may be determined with a different determination rate corresponding to the performance pattern to be the character movement performance pattern. For example, the determination rate may be set so that the third suggestion performance pattern that can be determined to be the switching suggestion performance pattern with a high determination rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSC is the character movement performance pattern can be determined to be the switching suggestion performance pattern with a low determination rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB is the character movement performance pattern. In addition, the fourth suggestion performance pattern that can be determined as a switching suggestion performance pattern with a low determination rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSC is a character movement performance pattern may be set to a determination rate such that it can be determined as a switching suggestion performance pattern with a high determination rate when the performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB is a character movement performance pattern. With such settings, when a switching suggestion performance is executed with the fourth suggestion performance pattern, the character movement performance as a specific performance that started to be executed with the first pattern is executed by maintaining the second pattern without switching to the second pattern at a higher rate than when a switching suggestion performance is executed with the third suggestion performance pattern. In this way, the character movement performance may be executed without switching from the first pattern to the second pattern at different rates depending on which of the multiple performance modes the switching suggestion performance is.

Figure 10-34 (D) shows a performance example 002AK124 in which a character hiding performance is executed, among cases in which a variable display that is a two-times-backward change is executed following the end of the variable display that is a three-times-backward change in performance example 002AK103 shown in Figure 10-32 (C2). In this performance execution example 002AK124, a character hiding display is executed using a performance image that forms the hidden display CK01.

The character concealment display may be executed in any one of a number of different presentation modes. As in the case of presentation execution example 002AK114 shown in FIG. 10-33 (D), when it is decided to execute a character concealment presentation in step AKS043 of the character movement presentation execution processing shown in FIG. 10-24, the presentation pattern to be used for the concealment presentation may be determined to be any one of a number of patterns prepared in advance. In this case, the presentation pattern to be used for the concealment presentation may be determined with a different determination rate in accordance with the presentation pattern to be used for the character movement presentation.

Figures 10-34 (E) and 10-34 (F) show examples of performance execution in which a character movement performance in a variable display that changes two times is executed following the execution of a switching suggestion performance in performance execution example 002AK123. In performance execution example 002AK125 shown in Figure 10-34 (E), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which the same character CH11 is displayed without switching as before the switching suggestion performance is executed. In performance execution example 002AK126 shown in Figure 10-34 (F), a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which a character CH01 different from the one displayed before the switching suggestion performance is executed is displayed. In the case of the movement performance type RSB, if it is any of RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-4-4 shown in Figure 10-16, even if a switching suggestion performance such as performance execution example 002AK123 is executed, it is possible to execute a character movement performance without switching the display of character CH11 as in performance execution example 002AK125. In contrast, in the case of the movement effect type RSC, if it is any of the effect patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4 shown in FIG. 10-17, it is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the display switches from character CH11 to character CH01 as in effect execution example 002AK126 by executing a switch suggestion effect such as effect execution example 002AK123. Therefore, when a switch suggestion effect such as effect execution example 002AK123 is executed and the character display is not switched, it is possible to continue to execute a character movement effect that becomes a specific effect in the effect pattern that becomes the first pattern such as effect execution example 002AK125. In contrast, when a switch suggestion effect such as effect execution example 002AK123 is executed and the character display is switched, it is possible to execute a character movement effect that becomes a specific effect in the effect pattern that becomes the second pattern such as effect execution example 002AK126.

Figures 10-35 and 10-36 show examples of performance execution using character movement performance corresponding to the previous change or the variable display that is the target change. Figure 10-35 (A1) shows performance execution example 002AK131 when a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern that displays character CH01 in the variable display that is the previous change. In the case of the movement performance type RSA, if the performance pattern RPA1-1-1 shown in Figure 10-15 is used, it is possible to execute a character movement performance that displays character CH01 in the previous change such as performance execution example 002AK131. Also, in the case of the movement performance type RSC, if the performance pattern RPC1-1-1 shown in Figure 10-17 is used, it is possible to execute a character movement performance that displays character CH01 in the previous change such as performance execution example 002AK131. When a character movement performance is executed in the variable display that is the previous change, an inheritance determination performance may be executed. In performance execution example 002AK131, the display of character CH101 makes it possible to recognize that execution of the inheritance determination performance has begun.

Figures 10-35 (B1) and 10-35 (C1) show examples of performance execution in which, following the display of characters CH101 and the like in performance execution example 002AK131, an inheritance judgment performance progresses in the character movement performance. In performance execution example 002AK132 shown in Figure 10-35 (B1), a battle performance is executed between character CH01, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance, and character CH101 in the inheritance judgment performance. In performance execution example 002AK133 shown in Figure 10-35 (C1), a defeat performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH01 has lost the battle, as the performance result in the battle performance of performance execution example 002AK132. In this case, the character movement performance that was executed up until the variable display that is the previous change ends, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited in the variable display that is the target change that is the subject of the judgment. In the performance execution example 002AK133, when the defeat performance is executed, the variable display of the performance pattern may be temporarily stopped, so that the performance result in the battle performance can be easily recognized by the player. When the variable display of the performance pattern is temporarily stopped, it is only necessary that the variable display of the small pattern can be continuously executed in the small pattern display area AKC0. As the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance is notified, the performance pattern previously set as a pre-reading chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping with the display in the character movement performance, so that the attention of the player to the character movement performance can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved. FIG. 10-35 (D1) shows a performance execution example 002AK134 in which a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of the variable display that is the previous variation in which the character movement performance such as the performance execution examples 002AK131 to 002AK133 was executed. When a character movement performance is executed in response to one of the performance patterns included in the movement performance types RSA and RSC, the character movement performance is executed in a second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode after the variable display that is the target change, by ending the execution of the character movement performance in the variable display that is the previous change. In the case of the movement performance type RSA, the character movement performance can be executed in different performance modes corresponding to a plurality of performance patterns that can be determined for the character movement performance pattern. The performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA displays any of the characters CH01 to CH04 as being changeable for each variable display. Then, it is sufficient that the determination rate of the performance pattern is set so that the expectation level of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed. For example, it is sufficient that the expectation level of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the character CH04 is displayed than when any of the characters CH01 to CH03 is displayed. In this way, when the character movement performance is executed in the second pattern in which the performance mode is not inherited, the expectation level of being controlled to the jackpot game state may differ depending on the plurality of types of performance modes.

In addition, in the character movement presentation, after character CH01 is displayed, it can change and be displayed as any of characters CH02 to CH04. In contrast to this, in the character movement presentation, after character CH02 is displayed, it can change and be displayed as either character CH03 or CH04, but the presentation pattern is configured so that it does not change to display character CH01. In the character movement presentation, after character CH03 is displayed, it can change and be displayed as character CH04, but the presentation pattern is configured so that it does not change to display either character CH01 or CH02. In the character movement presentation, after character CH04 is displayed, it does not change to display any of characters CH01 to CH03. In the character movement presentation, the determination rate of the presentation pattern may be set so that when character CH04 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, when character CH03 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the next highest, when character CH02 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the next highest, and when character CH01 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In this case, if any of characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed and the player is able to recognize the jackpot expectation corresponding to that display, and then the display changes to a character with a low jackpot expectation, the player's once heightened sense of expectation may be diminished, and interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, if the character movement effect can be executed in a plurality of different presentation modes, and the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the plurality of presentation modes, a restriction may be set so that after the character movement effect is executed in a first presentation mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high, it does not change to a second presentation mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is lower than that of the first presentation mode. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to a decrease in expectation.

Figure 10-35 (A2) shows a performance execution example 002AK135 in which a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern that displays character CH11 in the variable display that is the previous change. In the case of the movement performance type RSB, if it is any of the performance patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-1-4 shown in Figure 10-16, it is possible to execute a character movement performance that displays character CH11 in the previous change as in performance execution example 002AK135. In addition, in the case of the movement performance type RSD, if it is any of the performance patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4 shown in Figure 10-18, it is possible to execute a character movement performance that displays character CH11 in the previous change as in performance execution example 002AK135. In performance execution example 002AK135 as well, it is sufficient to make it possible to recognize that the execution of the inheritance determination performance has started by the display of character CH101, as in performance execution example 002AK131.

Figures 10-35 (B2) and 10-35 (C2) show examples of performance execution in which, following the display of characters CH101 and the like in performance execution example 002AK135, an inheritance judgment performance progresses in the character movement performance. In performance execution example 002AK136 shown in Figure 10-35 (B2), a battle performance is executed between character CH11, who has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance, and character CH101 in the inheritance judgment performance. In performance execution example 002AK137 shown in Figure 10-35 (C2), a victory performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH11 has won the battle, as the performance result in the battle performance of performance execution example 002AK136. In this case, the character movement performance that was executed up until the variable display that is the previous change continues, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited in the variable display that is the target change that is the subject of the judgment. In the performance execution example 002AK137, when the victory performance is executed, the variable display of the performance symbol may be temporarily stopped, so that the performance result in the battle performance can be easily recognized by the player. When the variable display of the performance symbol is temporarily stopped, it is sufficient that the variable display of the small symbol can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0. As the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance is notified, the performance symbol previously set as a pre-reading chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping with the display in the character movement performance, so that the attention of the player to the character movement performance can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved. FIG. 10-35 (D2) shows a performance execution example 002AK138 in which a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of the variable display that is the previous variation in which the character movement performance such as the performance execution examples 002AK135 to 002AK137 was executed. In the performance example 002AK138, the display of character CH11 in the character movement performance reaches the arrival display position, and a performance is executed by displaying a display image including a text image announcing a message. When a character movement performance is executed in accordance with one of the performance patterns included in the movement performance types RSB and RSD, the character movement performance is executed in the first pattern that inherits the performance mode after the variable display that is the target change, because the character movement performance does not end in the variable display that is the previous change.

Figure 10-36 (A1) shows a performance execution example 002AK141 in which a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which character CH02 is displayed in a variable display that is the previous change. In the case of a movement performance type RSA, if the performance pattern is one in which character CH02 is set in response to the previous change, such as performance pattern RPA1-1-2 shown in Figure 10-15, a character movement performance that displays character CH02 in the previous change, such as performance execution example 002AK141, can be executed. In the case of a movement performance type RSC, if the performance pattern is one in which character CH02 is set in response to the previous change, such as performance pattern RPC1-1-2 shown in Figure 10-17, a character movement performance that displays character CH02 in the previous change, such as performance execution example 002AK141, can be executed. In performance execution example 002AK141, as in performance execution example 002AK121, it is sufficient to make it possible to recognize that execution of the inheritance determination performance has begun by displaying character CH101.

Figures 10-36 (B1) and 10-36 (C1) show examples of performance execution in which, following the display of characters CH101 and the like in performance execution example 002AK141, an inheritance judgment performance progresses in the character movement performance. In performance execution example 002AK142 shown in Figure 10-36 (B1), a battle performance is executed between character CH02, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance, and character CH101 in the inheritance judgment performance. In performance execution example 002AK143 shown in Figure 10-36 (C1), a defeat performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH02 has lost the battle, as the performance result in the battle performance of performance execution example 002AK142. In this case, the character movement performance that was executed up until the variable display that is the previous change ends, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited in the variable display that is the target change that is the subject of the judgment. In the performance execution example 002AK143, when the defeat performance is executed, the variable display of the performance pattern may be temporarily stopped, so that the performance result in the battle performance can be easily recognized by the player. When the variable display of the performance pattern is temporarily stopped, it is only necessary that the variable display of the small pattern can be continuously executed in the small pattern display area AKC0. As the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance is notified, the performance pattern previously set as a pre-reading chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping with the display in the character movement performance, so that the attention of the player to the character movement performance can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved. FIG. 10-36 (D1) shows a performance execution example 002AK144 in which a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of the variable display that is the previous variation in which the character movement performance such as the performance execution examples 002AK141 to 002AK143 was executed. When a character movement performance is executed in accordance with one of the performance patterns included in the movement performance types RSA and RSC, the execution of the character movement performance ends in the variable display that is the previous change, and the character movement performance is executed in a second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode after the variable display that is the target change.

Figure 10-36 (A2) shows performance execution example 002AK145 when a character movement performance is executed in response to a performance pattern in which character CH12 is displayed in a variable display that is the previous change. In the case of movement performance type RSB, if the performance pattern is one in which character CH12 is set in response to the previous change, such as performance pattern RPB1-1-2-2 shown in Figure 10-16, it is possible to execute a character movement performance that displays character CH12 in the previous change, such as performance execution example 002AK145. In addition, in the case of movement performance type RSD, if the performance pattern is one in which character CH12 is set in response to the previous change, such as performance pattern RPD1-1-2-2 shown in Figure 10-18, it is possible to execute a character movement performance that displays character CH12 in the previous change, such as performance execution example 002AK145. In performance execution example 002AK145, just like performance execution example 002AK141, the display of character CH101 makes it possible to recognize that execution of the inheritance determination performance has begun.

Figures 10-36 (B2) and 10-36 (C2) show examples of performance execution in which, following the display of characters CH101 and the like in performance execution example 002AK145, an inheritance judgment performance progresses in the character movement performance. In performance execution example 002AK146 shown in Figure 10-36 (B2), a battle performance is executed between character CH12, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement performance, and character CH101 in the inheritance judgment performance. In performance execution example 002AK147 shown in Figure 10-36 (C2), a victory performance is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH12 has won the battle, as the performance result in the battle performance of performance execution example 002AK146. In this case, the character movement performance that was executed up until the variable display that is the previous change continues, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited in the variable display that is the target change that is the subject of the judgment. In the performance execution example 002AK137, when the victory performance is executed, the variable display of the performance symbol may be temporarily stopped, so that the performance result in the battle performance can be easily recognized by the player. When the variable display of the performance symbol is temporarily stopped, it is sufficient that the variable display of the small symbol can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0. As the execution result of the inheritance judgment performance included in such a character movement performance is notified, the performance symbol previously set as a pre-reading chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping with the display in the character movement performance, so that the attention of the player to the character movement performance can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved. FIG. 10-36 (D2) shows a performance execution example 002AK148 in which a variable display that is a target variation is executed following the end of the variable display that is the previous variation in which the character movement performance such as the performance execution examples 002AK145 to 002AK147 was executed. In the performance execution example 002AK148, a performance is executed by displaying a display image including a text image announcing a message as the display of character CH12 in the character movement performance reaches the destination display position. The message announced when the display of character CH12 in the character movement performance reaches the destination display position may be a different message from the message announced when the display of character CH11 in the character movement performance reaches the destination display position. In this way, a message may be announced in a different notification mode corresponding to the performance mode when the character movement performance is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment. When a character movement performance is executed in accordance with one of the performance patterns included in the movement performance types RSB and RSD, the character movement performance is executed in the first pattern that inherits the performance mode after the variable display that is the target variation, since the execution of the character movement performance does not end in the variable display that is the previous variation.

Figure 10-37 (A) shows a setting example 002AKE01 of the character display rate corresponding to the movement performance types RSA and RSD. In this setting example 002AKE01, when a character movement performance is executed in a variable display with a three-times-backward change, the display rate of each character set in the second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode is a different display rate corresponding to the movement performance types RSA and RSD. The three-times-backward change display character shows the character that is displayed when a character movement performance is executed in a variable display with a three-times-backward change.

In the case of the moving performance type RSA, the performance pattern is determined with a determination rate such as the determination example 002AKD13 shown in FIG. 10-19 (A). In the case of the moving performance type RSD, the performance pattern is determined with a determination rate such as the determination example 002AKD16 shown in FIG. 10-20 (B). With such settings, in the case of the moving performance type RSA, the display rate of the character CH01 corresponding to the three-times-ago change is higher than that of the moving performance type RSD, both in the case of a miss and a jackpot. In contrast, in the case of the moving performance type RSA, the display rates of the characters CH02 to CH04 corresponding to the three-times-ago change are all lower than that of the moving performance type RSD, both in the case of a miss and a jackpot. Therefore, when the character CH01 is displayed among the cases in which the character moving performance is executed in the variable display that is the three-times-ago change, the percentage of the moving performance type RSA is higher and the percentage of the moving performance type RSD is lower than that of the cases in which any of the characters CH02 to CH04 are displayed. When a character movement performance is executed in a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD, a victory performance is executed after the inheritance judgment performance in the variable display that is the one-time previous change, and the performance mode is inherited after the variable display that is the target change, which is the first pattern. When the character CH01 is displayed in the variable display that is the three-time previous change, the rate of the movement performance type RSA is high, and the rate of the character movement performance being switched to the first pattern and executed after the execution of the character movement performance that is the specific performance in the second pattern is low. On the other hand, when any of the characters CH02 to CH04 are displayed in the variable display that is the three-time previous change, the rate of the movement performance type RSD is high, and the rate of the character movement performance being switched to the first pattern and executed after the execution of the character movement performance that is the specific performance in the second pattern is high. In this way, the rate of the character movement performance being switched to the first pattern and executed can be made different in response to a plurality of second patterns with different performance modes, such as the characters displayed in the variable display that is the three-time previous change. It is not limited to the characters displayed in the variable display that changes three times before, but rather it is sufficient to have different rates at which the character movement effect that results in a specific effect is switched to the first pattern in response to multiple second patterns that have different presentation modes in the character movement effect that results in a specific effect.

Figure 10-37 (B) shows a setting example 002AKE02 of the character display rate corresponding to the movement performance types RSB and RSD. In this setting example 002AKE02, when a character movement performance is executed in the variable display that is the target change, the display rate of each character set in the first pattern that inherits the performance mode is a different display rate corresponding to the 3-times-ago change display character that can be displayed for each of the movement performance types RSB and RSD. The 3-times-ago change display character is a character that is displayed when a character movement performance is executed in the variable display that is the 3-times-ago change, and when the movement performance type is RSB, any of the characters CH11 to CH14 can be displayed, and when the movement performance type is RSD, any of the characters CH01 to CH04 can be displayed.

In the case of the moving performance type RSB, the performance pattern is determined with a determination rate such as the determination example 002AKD14 shown in FIG. 10-19 (B). In the case of the moving performance type RSD, the performance pattern is determined with a determination rate such as the determination example 002AKD16 shown in FIG. 10-20 (B). With such settings, in the case of the moving performance type RSB, when the character CH11 corresponding to the three-times-ago change is selected, the display rate of the character CH11 corresponding to the target change when the result is a miss is the highest. In contrast, in the case of the moving performance type RSD, when the character CH01 corresponding to the three-times-ago change is selected, the display rate of the character CH14 corresponding to the target change when the result is a miss is the highest. In addition, the display rate of the characters CH11 to CH14 that become the target change display character is different when the three-times-ago change display character is one of the characters CH11 to CH14 corresponding to the moving performance type RSB, and when the three-times-ago change display character is one of the characters CH01 to CH04 corresponding to the moving performance type RSD. Therefore, in cases where a character movement presentation is executed in a variable display that is a three-times-before change, the ratio of which of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in the variable display that is the target change differs between a case where any of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in a presentation pattern included in the movement presentation type RSB and a case where characters CH01 to CH04 are displayed in a presentation pattern included in the movement presentation type RSD. In this way, the ratio of which of the multiple first patterns with different presentation modes, such as the characters displayed in the variable display that is the target change, is executed in a specific presentation can be made different between a case where a character movement presentation that is a specific presentation is started in a first pattern in which any of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in a variable display that is a three-times-before change, and a case where a character movement presentation that is a specific presentation is started in a second pattern in which any of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed in a variable display that is a three-times-before change, and then the first pattern is switched to. It is not limited to the characters displayed in the three previous variations or the variable display that is the target variation, and it is sufficient if the ratio of the character movement performance resulting in a specific performance being executed in one of the multiple first patterns is different when starting to execute a character movement performance resulting in a specific performance in the first pattern and when switching to the first pattern after starting to execute a character movement performance resulting in a specific performance in the second pattern.

The control data in the presentation control pattern may be set so that the presentation state at the start of the character movement presentation is different when the presentation execution is started with the presentation pattern included in the movement presentation type RSB and when the presentation execution is started with the presentation pattern included in the movement presentation type RSD. For example, the control data in the presentation control pattern may be set so that when any of characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed with the presentation pattern included in the movement presentation type RSB, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is louder than when characters CH01 to CH04 are displayed with the presentation pattern included in the movement presentation type RSD. In addition, the presentation state may be changed using any presentation device such as the display of a presentation image on the image display device 5, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

Figure 10-38 shows an example of a performance execution when an active display change performance is executed. When the display result in the variable display of the performance execution example 002AK201 shown in Figure 10-38 (A) is stopped and the variable display ends, the reserved display corresponding to the reserved number "1" in the reserved memory display area AKB0 is displayed in green using the display image AKE2. In step AKS006 of the pre-reading performance setting process shown in Figure 10-11, the performance image to be the reserved display image is determined, and in response to this determination result, the reserved display update setting at the time of starting winning is performed in step AKS007, so that the reserved display using the display image AKE2 can be started in response to the occurrence of a starting winning. In the performance execution example 002AK202 shown in Figure 10-38 (B), the reserved display is shifted and the active display is updated when a new variable display is started following the performance execution example 002AK201. At this time, step AKS102 of the effect pattern change start process shown in Figure 10-27 determines that "active display change effect is on" to execute the active display change effect.

Based on the result of the determination in step AKS102, a performance pattern to be used as the active display change performance pattern is determined in step AKS104. Then, in step AKS107, a performance control pattern corresponding to the active display change performance pattern is determined. Using the performance control pattern thus determined, performance control for executing the active display change performance is possible in step AKS131 of the performance pattern change processing shown in FIG. 10-31. For example, when the performance pattern YAP2-2 shown in FIG. 10-28(C) is determined as the active display change performance pattern, the execution of the active display change performance including the action performance such as the performance execution example 002AK203 shown in FIG. 10-38(C) is started. The action performance may be a display performance in which the display of a performance image different from the active display acts on the active display. When the active display change performance is executed in the performance pattern YAP2-2, the display mode of the active display can be changed twice, and the second change is performed after the first change. FIG. 10-38 (D) shows performance example 002AK204, which is the first change following performance example 002AK203, in which the display mode of the active display changes to a display mode that notifies the user of the "Chance" message using display image AKE12.

In the performance execution example 002AK204, after the display mode of the active display is changed from the first mode by the display image AKE2 to the second mode by the display image AKE12, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state than the first mode, the display color of the active display becomes green as a history suggestion performance corresponding to the first mode before the change. Such performance control may be performed using a performance control pattern determined in correspondence with the active display change performance pattern. A predetermined suggestion performance period may be set in advance as the execution period of the history suggestion performance. Until the end of this suggestion performance period, a restriction may be set so that an action performance that changes the display mode of the active display to the next one is not executed. The suggestion performance period may be a period of a fixed time, or may be a period until the timing when a reach performance that becomes a normal reach is executed when the variable display is in a reach state. In addition, the suggestion performance period may be any period that is set in advance in correspondence with the progress of the performance. FIG. 10-38(E) shows a performance example 002AK205 when the suggestion performance period ends after performance example 002AK204. In this case, the green active display in the history suggestion performance ends and is controlled to a normal white display or the like. The history suggestion performance is not limited to a performance image that corresponds to the first state before the change by the display color of the performance image, and may be a performance image that displays the first state before the change in a recognizable manner, for example, by displaying a small display image before the change separately from the display image after the change.

Figure 10-38 (F) shows performance example 002AK206, in which an action performance in an active display change performance is executed after performance execution example 002AK205. Figure 10-38 (G) shows performance execution example 002AK207, in which, following performance execution example 002AK206, the display mode of the active display changes for the second time to a display mode that notifies the message "Super Hot" using display image AKE13.

A change effect that changes the display mode of an active display that is a corresponding display that corresponds to a variable display, such as an active display change effect, may be executable in different performance modes, for example, by executing an action effect in one of a plurality of performance modes. In this case, a similar history suggestion performance may be executable when the active display change effect is executed in a first performance mode of the plurality of performance modes and when it is executed in a second performance mode. In this way, when a change effect that changes the display mode of a corresponding display that corresponds to a variable display can be executed, it is sufficient that a history suggestion performance corresponding to the first mode before the change can be executed after execution of the change effect has begun, regardless of whether the change effect is executed in any of a plurality of performance modes.

Figure 10-39 shows an example of control of the execution of the active display change performance shown in Figure 10-38. In this example of control, the previous variable display, such as the performance execution example 002AK201 shown in Figure 10-38 (A), is ended before the timing T01 at which the variable display at which the active display change performance is executed starts to change. Then, in response to the start of the change at timing T01, the active display in the active display area AKA0 is updated as in the performance execution example 002AK202 shown in Figure 10-38 (B), and a green display using the display image AKE2 is performed as the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. After that, the execution of the active display change performance is started at timing T02, and in the period up to timing T03, a performance image such as the performance execution example 002AK203 shown in Figure 10-38 (C) is displayed as an action performance corresponding to the first change. When the action performance corresponding to the first change ends at timing T03, the display mode of the active display changes and the execution of the history suggestion performance is started. As a result, during the period up to timing T04, a history suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK204 shown in Figure 10-38 (D) is executed.

When the history suggestion effect ends at timing T04, the display color is set to the normal display white or the like as the display mode of the active display, and an active display like the effect execution example 002AK205 shown in FIG. 10-38 (E) is performed. Furthermore, at timing T05, an action effect corresponding to the second change in the active display change effect is started, and in the period up to timing T06, an effect image like the effect execution example 002AK206 shown in FIG. 10-38 (F) is displayed. When the action effect corresponding to the second change ends at timing T06, the display mode of the active display changes. As a result, after timing T06, an active display like the effect execution example 002AK207 shown in FIG. 10-38 (G) becomes possible.

In this way, when an active display change effect is executed, it is possible to execute a change effect in which the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display, is changed from the first mode to the second mode, which has a higher jackpot expectation rate than the first mode. In addition, when the display mode of the active display is changed by the active display change effect, it is possible to execute a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change after the active display change effect is started. This makes it possible to recognize the display mode before the change when the display mode of the corresponding active display changes, and it is possible to improve the interest in playing. Note that it is not limited to the display mode of the active display, and it is sufficient that, when the performance mode changes from the first mode in any performance to the second mode, which has a higher jackpot expectation rate than the first mode, it is possible to execute a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change after the performance execution is started. In this way, it is sufficient to be able to improve the interest in playing by making the performance mode before the change recognizable. When a specific effect including a character movement effect is executed, a history suggestion effect may be executed in response to switching to the first pattern and executing the specific effect after starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, so that after the specific effect switched to the first pattern is started, the effect state corresponding to the second pattern before switching can be recognized. All or part of the change effect and history suggestion effect may be executed using any effect device, such as displaying an effect image on the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

Figure 10-40 shows an example of a performance execution when a reach performance that results in a super reach is executed. In step AKS107 of the performance pattern change start processing shown in Figure 10-27, a performance control pattern corresponding to the change pattern is determined. Using the performance control pattern determined in step AKS107, step AKS133 of the performance pattern change processing shown in Figure 10-31 enables performance control for executing a reach performance that results in a super reach. Figure 10-40 (A) shows a performance execution example 002AK301 corresponding to the start of a reach performance that results in a super reach. In this case, character CH201, which is an ally character, and character CH202, which is an enemy character, are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, a blue background display is performed in the display area around character CH201 as the corresponding display color of character CH201, and a red background display is performed in the display area around character CH202 as the corresponding display color of character CH202. Also, an effect image is displayed to notify that a battle chance is coming in which character CH201, who will be an ally character, and character CH202, who will be an enemy character, will battle. In this battle chance, if character CH201, who will be an ally character, wins the battle against character CH202, who will be an enemy character, it is notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Such reach effects, including the display of character CH201, who will be an ally character, and character CH202, who will be an enemy character, are included in the suggestive effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

Figure 10-40 (B) shows a performance execution example 002AK302 in which character CH201, who will be an ally character, is introduced following performance execution example 002AK301. At this time, a performance is executed in which character CH201 is displayed as a first character display performance included in the first performance. Also, a performance is executed in which a message introducing character CH201 is displayed in a display area displayed in blue as a first character introduction performance included in a first response performance corresponding to the first performance. This makes it possible to execute the first performance and the first response performance corresponding to the first performance.

Figure 10-40 (C) shows a performance execution example 002AK303 in which character CH201, an ally character, is being displayed after performance execution example 002AK302. In this case, the performance of displaying character CH201 continues as the first character display performance included in the first performance. Meanwhile, the first character introduction performance included in the first response performance corresponding to the first performance ends, and a performance of displaying a message to introduce character CH202 in a display area displayed in red is executed as the second character introduction performance included in the second response performance corresponding to the second performance. This makes it possible to start the execution of the second response performance during the execution of the first performance, before switching from the first performance to the second performance.

Figure 10-40 (D) shows performance execution example 002AK304 in which character CH202, the enemy character, is displayed following performance execution example 002AK303. At this time, a performance is executed in which character CH202 is displayed as a second character display performance included in the second performance. Also, a performance is executed in which a message introducing character CH202 is displayed in a display area displayed in red as a second character introduction performance included in a second response performance corresponding to the second performance. This makes it possible to execute a second performance in which the first performance is switched, and a second response performance corresponding to the second performance. Note that some of the performance aspects in the second response performance may differ between the case in which the execution of the second response performance is started during the execution of the first performance, as in performance execution example 002AK303, and the case in which a second response performance corresponding to the second performance is executed, as in performance execution example 002AK304. For example, in performance execution example 002AK303 and performance execution example 002AK304, the display area in which the performance by displaying a message is executed is displayed in red, but the size, shape, pattern, presence or absence of effect display added to the display area, size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of any performance image may be different. Also, when a message is displayed by character CH202 speaking lines, the lines of character CH202 may not be notifiable in performance execution example 002AK303, and the lines of character CH202 may be notifiable in performance execution example 002AK304.

In this way, when a reach effect that results in a super reach is executed, it is possible to execute a first character display effect that is the first effect, and a second character display effect that is the second effect that is switched to after the execution of the first effect, as suggestive effects in the reach effect that suggest that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. It is also possible to execute a first character introduction effect that is the first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect, and a second character introduction effect that is the second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect. And, it is possible to start the execution of the second character introduction effect during the execution of the first character display effect, before switching from the first character display effect to the second character display effect. This makes it easy to recognize the switching of effects and their relationship, improving the enjoyment of the game.

After displaying character CH202, which is an enemy character, as in performance execution example 002AK304, a third performance may be executed in which neither character CH201 nor character CH202 is displayed. When such a third performance is executed, the third performance may be executed in a performance mode different from the performance mode of the first response performance and the performance mode of the second response performance, or only the third performance may be executed without executing the third response performance. The third performance may be, for example, a flash display performance in which the display screen of the image display device 5 flashes, or a rainbow lighting performance in which light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs are lit up in rainbow colors. In addition, all or part of the third performance may be executed using any performance device, such as the display of a performance image on the image display device 5, the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

After displaying character CH202, which will be the enemy character as in performance execution example 002AK304, a post-introduction performance may be executed in which both character CH201 and character CH202 are displayed. When such a post-introduction performance is executed, it may be possible to execute the corresponding performance in a performance mode common to either the performance mode of the first corresponding performance or the performance mode of the second corresponding performance. Which performance mode the corresponding performance is executed in may be determined to be a different performance mode depending on the progress control of the performance, such as the performance content in the reach performance that will be the subsequent super reach. For example, when character CH201 is the first to attack, a corresponding performance corresponding to the post-introduction performance may be executed in the performance mode of the first corresponding performance.

When a first character display performance included in a first performance such as performance execution example 002AK302 is executed and a first character introduction performance included in a first response performance is executed, the second response performance may be executed in a performance manner that is more difficult to recognize than the first response performance. When a second character display performance included in a second performance such as performance execution example 002AK304 is executed and a second character introduction performance included in a second response performance is executed, the first response performance may be executed in a performance manner that is more difficult to recognize than the second response performance. The first response performance and the second response performance may be executed in a performance manner that is more difficult to recognize by varying the size, transmittance, clarity, color, volume of the audio output, amount of light emitted by the light-emitting member, light color, or any other performance manner.

In the case where a second performance that is switched to after the execution of the first performance is executable, not limited to a reach performance that is a super reach, and is not limited to a reach performance that is a super reach, may be executed during the execution of the first performance before switching from the first performance to the second performance. In the case where a specific performance including a character movement performance is executed, the specific performance is executed by switching to the first pattern after starting the execution of the specific performance in the second pattern, and the second response performance corresponding to the specific performance executed in the second pattern and the first response performance corresponding to the specific performance executed in the first pattern may be executed. In this case, the execution of the first response performance may be started during the execution of the specific performance in the second pattern before switching to the first pattern after starting the execution of the specific performance in the second pattern. All or part of the first performance, the first response performance, the second performance, and the second response performance may be executed using any performance device such as display of a performance image on the image display device 5, output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

Figure 10-41 shows an example of the execution of a performance when the performance pattern is displayed transparently in association with the post-reach performance. The post-reach performance can be executed when the variable display is in a reach state based on the determination result by step AKS106 of the performance pattern change start processing shown in Figure 10-27. However, if only the reach performance resulting in a normal reach is executed and the reach performance resulting in a super reach is not executed, the post-reach performance does not have to be executed. Alternatively, if only the reach performance resulting in a normal reach is executed and the reach performance resulting in a super reach is not executed, the post-reach performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the reach performance resulting in a super reach is executed.

Figures 10-41 (A1) to 10-41 (C1) show examples of performance execution when a background display performance is executed as a post-reach performance. Performance execution example 002AK401 shown in Figure 10-41 (A1) displays a performance image transparently in association with a background display performance using display image AKF1. Performance execution example 002AK402 shown in Figure 10-41 (B1) displays a performance image transparently in association with a background display performance using display image AKF2. Performance execution example 002AK403 shown in Figure 10-41 (C1) displays a performance image transparently in association with a background display performance using display image AKF3. In these cases, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently at a constant transparency, which is the first transparency, during a specific period from the start to the end of the background display performance, which is the post-reach performance.

Figures 10-41 (A2) to 10-41 (D2) show examples of performance execution when a step-up performance is executed as a post-reach performance. In performance execution example 002AK411 shown in Figure 10-41 (A2), a display image AKG1 is displayed corresponding to the step number "1" of the first stage in the step-up performance. In performance execution example 002AK412 shown in Figure 10-41 (B2), a display image AKG2 is displayed corresponding to the step number "2" of the second stage in the step-up performance. In performance execution example 002AK413 shown in Figure 10-41 (C2), a display image AKG3 is displayed corresponding to the step number "3" of the third stage in the step-up performance. In performance execution example 002AK414 shown in Figure 10-41 (D2), a display image AKG4 is displayed corresponding to the step number "4" of the fourth stage in the step-up performance. In these cases, the performance symbol can be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specific period from the start to the end of the step-up performance that is the post-reach performance, and at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period.

Figure 10-42 shows an example of the execution control of an effect in which the effect pattern is displayed transparently in association with the post-reach effect. In step AKS107 of the effect pattern change start processing shown in Figure 10-27, an effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the post-reach effect is determined. Using the effect control pattern determined in step AKS107, step AKS133 of the effect pattern change processing shown in Figure 10-31 enables effect control for displaying the effect pattern transparently together with the post-reach effect. Figure 10-42 (A) shows the effect execution period in which the post-reach effect can be executed. In this case, the variable display in which the reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed starts to change at timing T11. After that, when the variable display becomes a reach state at timing T12, the execution of the post-reach effect starts in response to the establishment of the reach, and the post-reach effect can be executed in a specific period until timing T13. When the post-reach performance ends at timing T13, the development performance is executed, and in the period up to timing T14, the reach performance that becomes the super reach can be executed.

In the period from timing T12 to timing T13 when the post-reach performance can be executed, the performance pattern can be made transparent and displayed according to the transition pattern. When the post-reach performance is determined by step AKS106 of the performance pattern change start processing shown in FIG. 10-27, it is possible to determine a pattern transparency pattern corresponding to the determination result of the post-reach performance, as in the determination example 002AKD62 shown in FIG. 10-29 (B). It is sufficient that pattern transparency control that makes the performance pattern transparent can be executed by step AKS133 of the performance pattern change processing shown in FIG. 10-31 in response to the pattern transparency pattern determined by step AKS106.

Figure 10-42 (B) shows an example of setting the pattern transparency corresponding to the pattern transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in the determination example 002AKD62 shown in Figure 10-29 (B). When the post-reach performance is a background display performance, the pattern transparency pattern TSP1 is determined. The pattern transparency pattern TSP1 allows the performance pattern to be displayed transparently at a constant transparency, which is the first transparency, from timing T12, which is the start timing of the post-reach performance, to timing T13, which is the end timing of the post-reach performance. In this way, when any of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 corresponding to the background display performance is displayed in the post-reach performance, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently with the pattern transparency pattern TSP1, which is a transition pattern in which a constant transparency, which is the first transparency, is maintained, during the specific period from timing T12 to timing T13.

When the post-reach performance is a step-up performance, the symbol transparent pattern TSP2 is determined. The symbol transparent pattern TSP2 can display the performance pattern transparently at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance at timing T12, which is the start timing of the post-reach performance. After that, the symbol transparent pattern TSP2 changes so that the transmittance of the performance pattern becomes higher in stages. For example, the transmittance of the performance pattern can change so that the transmittance of the performance pattern becomes higher in stages at each timing when the display of the display images AKG1 to AKG4 changes in response to the step number in the step-up performance of "1" to "4". Then, the symbol transparent pattern TSP2 can display the performance pattern transparently at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance at timing T13, which is the end timing of the post-reach performance. In this way, when the display of the display images AKG1 to AKG4 corresponding to the step-up performance can be changed in the post-reach performance, during the specific period from timing T12 to timing T13, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently using the pattern transparent pattern TSP2, which is a transition pattern that can display the performance pattern at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specific period, and at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period.

When the post-reach performance is a story performance, the symbol transparent pattern TSP3 is determined. The symbol transparent pattern TSP3 can be displayed by transmitting the performance pattern at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance at timing T12, which is the start timing of the post-reach performance. After that, the symbol transparent pattern TSP3 changes so that the transmittance of the performance pattern becomes higher in a curved manner. For example, in the story performance, as a series of stories progress from displaying the display image AKH11 to displaying any one of the display images AKH41 to AKH44, the transmittance of the performance pattern can be changed so that it becomes higher in a curved manner. Then, the symbol transparent pattern TSP3 can be displayed by transmitting the performance pattern at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display performance at timing T13, which is the end timing of the post-reach performance. In this way, when the display image AKH11 corresponding to the story performance can be changed to any one of the display images AKH41 to AKH44 in the post-reach performance, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently in the pattern transparent pattern TSP3, which is a transition pattern in which the performance pattern can be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specific period from timing T12 to timing T13, and the performance pattern can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period. Note that the second transmittance corresponding to the case of the story performance may be a different transmittance from the second transmittance corresponding to the case of the step-up performance, or may be a common transmittance. In the setting example shown in FIG. 10-42(B), all the second transmittances are common to 0% at timing T12. The third transmittance corresponding to the case of the story performance may be a different transmittance from the third transmittance corresponding to the case of the step-up performance, or may be a common transmittance. In the setting example shown in FIG. 10-42(B), the third transmittance corresponding to the step-up presentation is 80% at timing T13, and the third transmittance corresponding to the story presentation is 100% at timing T13, resulting in different transmittances.

As shown in the example 002AKD61 in FIG. 10-29(A), the post-reach performance is determined with different determination rates depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". When a story performance is executed as the post-reach performance, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when a background display performance or a step-up performance is executed, and when a step-up performance is executed as the post-reach performance, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when a background display performance is executed. Therefore, when the post-reach performance is a background display performance, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently according to the pattern transparent pattern TSP1, and the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state can be suggested by displaying one of the display images AKF1 to AKF3. When the post-reach performance is a step-up performance, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently according to the pattern transmission pattern TSP2, and the display images AKG1 to AKG4 are displayed in a changeable manner, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot. When the post-reach performance is a story performance, the performance pattern can be displayed transparently according to the pattern transmission pattern TSP3, and the display images AKH11 to any of the display images AKH41 to AKH44 are displayed in a changeable manner, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot. In this way, the type of display image that will be the special image displayed differs depending on whether the pattern transmission pattern that is the transition pattern is the pattern transmission pattern TSP1 as the first transition pattern or any of the pattern transmission patterns TSP2 and TSP3 as the second transition pattern. This allows the post-reach performance included in the special performance to be appropriately executed so that attention to the display of the performance pattern as the transparent identification information is increased, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the performance pattern is displayed transparently according to the pattern transparent pattern TSP2 corresponding to the step-up performance after the reach performance, or when the performance pattern is displayed transparently according to the pattern transparent pattern TSP3 corresponding to the story performance after the reach performance, than when the performance pattern is displayed transparently according to the pattern transparent pattern TSP1 corresponding to the background display performance after the reach performance. The pattern transparent pattern TSP1 allows the performance pattern to be displayed at a first transmittance from the start to the end of the specific period as a first special performance corresponding to the background display performance. The pattern transparent pattern TSP2 allows the performance pattern to be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the start of the specific period as a second special performance corresponding to the step-up performance, and allows the performance pattern to be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the end of the specific period. The symbol transparency pattern TSP3 can display the effect symbol at a second transparency lower than the first transparency in response to the start of a specific period as a second special effect corresponding to a story effect, and can display the effect symbol at a third transparency higher than the first transparency in response to the end of the specific period. This allows the first special effect and the second special effect, which have different transparency settings, to be appropriately executed, increasing the interest in the game.

The pattern transparent pattern that allows the performance pattern to be displayed transparently may be determined at different rates, for example, in response to the performance mode of the preview performance executed before the reach-after performance. For example, when the reach-after performance is a background display performance, any of the pattern transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 may be determined at a predetermined rate, and when the preview performance executed before the reach-after performance is a performance mode with a low expectation of a jackpot, the determination rate of the pattern transparent pattern TSP1 may be set to be higher than the determination rate of the pattern transparent patterns TSP2 and TSP3. On the other hand, when the preview performance executed before the reach-after performance is a performance mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, the determination rate of the pattern transparent pattern TSP3 may be set to be higher than the determination rate of the pattern transparent patterns TSP1 and TSP2. In this way, the transition pattern when the performance pattern serving as the identification information is displayed transparently may be the first transition pattern or the second transition pattern in a different rate in response to the performance mode of the preview performance executed before the reach-after performance included in the reach-after performance that is a special performance.

When the post-reach effect is a background display effect, a special image may be displayed while the effect pattern is displayed transparently in this transparent pattern TSP1, thereby increasing the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state compared to when the effect pattern is displayed transparently according to either of the transparent pattern TSP2 or TSP3. For example, while the effect pattern is displayed transparently in the transparent pattern TSP1, a chance-up effect using a win confirmation image may be executed, thereby determining that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Also, while the effect pattern is displayed transparently in the transparent pattern TSP1, a transparent change effect using a change notification image may be executed, thereby changing the effect to one in which the effect image can be displayed transparently in either of the transparent pattern TSP2 or TSP3.

When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped while a post-reach effect, which is a special effect, is being executed, and the power supply is then resumed, regardless of whether the effect pattern is displayed transparently in any of the pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3, a common recovery effect may be executed, for example, using a recovery display image.

When the effect pattern is displayed transparently using any of the pattern transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3, the type, size, shape, pattern, color, and any other display mode of the effect pattern can be controlled so that it can be changed. The effect mode of the effect pattern can be set by the control data included in the effect control pattern.

When the time-saving condition based on the number of executions of the variable display is met, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state, and the determination rate of the transparent pattern TSP1 to TSP3, which is a transition pattern that can display the performance pattern serving as identification information through a transparent pattern, may be set to be different between when the game state is controlled to such a rescue time-saving state and when it is not controlled to such a rescue time-saving state. For example, when the post-reach performance is a background display performance, it may be possible to determine any of the transparent pattern TSP1 to TSP3 at a predetermined rate, and when the game state is controlled to the rescue time-saving state, the performance pattern may be displayed through the transparent pattern TSP3 at a higher rate than when the game state is not controlled to the rescue time-saving state.

When the time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is satisfied, the game state can be controlled to the time-saving state, and a restriction may be set so that the pattern transparency control that displays the effect pattern transparently in any of the pattern transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3 that are transition patterns is not executed in response to the variable display that satisfies the time-saving condition. In this way, a restriction may be set as a limit so that the pattern transparency control that displays the effect pattern transparently in any of the pattern transparency patterns TSP1 to TSP3 that are transition patterns is not executed within the range in which the variable display that satisfies the time-saving condition for controlling to the rescue time-saving is executed.

Figures 10-43 to 10-45 show examples of timer standby effects and effects when timer effects are executed. Of these, Figure 10-43 shows an example of effect execution when effect pattern TPA1 is determined as the timer performance pattern and effect pattern TPB0 is determined as the standby performance pattern based on the occurrence of a start winning. The timer standby effect can be executed when a start winning occurs based on the result of the determination by step AKS032 of the timer performance determination process shown in Figure 10-21. When "timer performance" is determined to execute a timer performance by step AKS032 of the timer performance determination process, a performance pattern to be the timer performance pattern is determined by step AKS034, and a performance pattern to be the standby performance pattern is determined by step AKS035. Next, the timer standby performance start setting in step AKS036 starts the execution of the timer standby performance.

Figure 10-43 (A) shows an example of performance execution 002AK601 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display of the performance symbols and the number of reserved memories becomes "3", and the timer performance determination process determines performance pattern TPA1 as the timer performance pattern and performance pattern TPB0 as the standby performance pattern. At this time, by displaying display image AKJ1 on the screen of image display device 5 as a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning, it is suggested that the execution of the timer performance is pending. In this way, the timer standby performance is executed with performance pattern TPB0 determined as the standby performance pattern before the variable display in which the timer performance is executed.

Figure 10-43 (B) shows performance execution example 002AK602 when a new variable display starts following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK601. Figure 10-43 (C) shows performance execution example 002AK603 when a new variable display starts following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK602. These variable displays are executed before the variable display in which the timer display is executed, and in response to these variable displays, a timer wait display in a continuous performance mode is executed in performance pattern TPB0. In this case, the timer wait display is executed in a performance mode in which the specific display does not change.

Figure 10-43 (D) shows performance execution example 002AK604 when a new variable display starts following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK603. When this variable display starts, a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA1, which has been determined as the timer performance pattern. When the timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA1, a special display is displayed using display image AKJ21 to notify the message "5 seconds left."

Figure 10-44 shows an example of a performance execution in which either of performance patterns TPA1 or TPA3 is determined as the timer performance pattern based on the occurrence of a start winning, and either of performance patterns TPB1-1 or TPB1-2 is determined as the standby performance pattern. Figure 10-44 (A) shows a performance execution example 002AK611 in which a specific display corresponding to a variable display based on a start winning is started, which is common to performance patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2. Regardless of whether performance pattern TPB1-1 or TPB1-2 is determined as the standby performance pattern, when the timer standby performance starts to be executed, the display image AKJ0 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, indicating that the execution of the timer performance is waiting. After that, the timer standby performance is executed in a change performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes in response to performance patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2.

Figures 10-44 (B1) and 10-44 (C1) show examples of performance execution when a timer wait performance is executed in performance pattern TPB1-1. Of these, Figure 10-44 (B1) shows performance execution example 002AK612 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK611. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer performance is executed, and in response to this variable display, a timer wait performance of the first change mode is executed in performance pattern TPB1-1. In this case, the specific display using display image AKJ0 changes to a specific display using display image AKJ1. Figure 10-44 (C1) shows performance execution example 002AK613 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK612. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer performance is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby performance of the first change mode is executed in performance pattern TPB1-1. Here, as with the previous variable display, a specific display is performed using display image AKJ1.

Figure 10-44 (D1) shows performance execution example 002AK614 when a new variable display starts following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK613. When this variable display starts, a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA1, which has been determined as the timer performance pattern. When the timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA1, a special display is displayed using display image AKJ21 to notify the message "5 seconds left."

Figures 10-44 (B2) and 10-44 (C2) show examples of performance execution when a timer wait performance is executed in performance pattern TPB1-2. Of these, Figure 10-44 (B2) shows performance execution example 002AK615 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK611. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer performance is executed, and in response to this variable display, a timer wait performance of the second change mode is executed in performance pattern TPB1-2. In this case, the specific display using display image AKJ0 changes to a specific display using display image AKJ2. Figure 10-44 (C2) shows performance execution example 002AK616 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK615. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer performance is executed, and in response to this variable display, the timer standby performance of the second change mode is executed in performance pattern TPB1-2. Here, as with the previous variable display, a specific display is performed using display image AKJ2.

Figure 10-44 (D2) shows performance execution example 002AK617 when a new variable display starts following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK616. When this variable display starts, a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA3, which has been determined as the timer performance pattern. When the timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA3, a special display is displayed using display image AKJ23 to notify the message "15 seconds left."

Figure 10-45 shows an example of a performance execution when either of performance patterns TPA2 or TPA4 is determined as a timer performance pattern based on the occurrence of a start winning, and either of performance patterns TPB2-1 or TPB2-2 is determined as a standby performance pattern. Figure 10-45 (A) shows a performance execution example 002AK621 when a specific display corresponding to a variable display based on a start winning is started, which is common to performance patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2. Regardless of whether performance pattern TPB2-1 or TPB2-2 is determined as a standby performance pattern, when the execution of the timer standby performance starts, the display image AKJ0 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the execution of the timer performance is standby. After that, in response to performance patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, a timer standby performance is executed in a continuation performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and a pre-stage performance is executed separately from the specific performance using the display image AKJ0. FIG. 10-45(B) shows performance execution example 002AK622, in which a new variable display starts following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK621. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer display is executed, and in response to this variable display, a timer standby display with a continuous change mode is executed in either performance pattern TPB2-1 or TPB2-2. In this case, the timer standby display is executed in a mode in which the specific display does not change.

Figure 10-45 (C1) shows performance execution example 002AK623 after a new variable display has started following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK622. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer display is executed, and in response to this variable display, a timer wait display of the continuing performance mode is executed in performance pattern TPB2-1. Here, as with the previous variable display, a specific display using display image AKJ0 is executed. In this case, a previous stage performance using display image AKJ11 is executed along with the timer wait performance by the specific display using display image AKJ0. The previous stage performance using display image AKJ11 only needs to be executable before the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK623, and only needs to be executable in response to either the start of the variable display, during the execution of the variable display, or the end of the variable display. FIG. 10-45 (D1) shows a performance execution example 002AK624 in which a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK623. When this variable display is started, a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA2, which has been determined as the timer performance pattern. When the timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA2, a special display is displayed using display image AKJ22 to notify the message "10 seconds left."

Figure 10-45 (C2) shows performance execution example 002AK625 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK622. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer display is executed, and in response to this variable display, a timer wait display of the continuing performance mode is executed in performance pattern TPB2-2. Here, as with the previous variable display, a specific display using display image AKJ0 is executed. In this case, a previous stage performance using display image AKJ12 is executed together with the timer wait performance by the specific display using display image AKJ0. The previous stage performance using display image AKJ12 only needs to be executable before the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK623, and only needs to be executable in response to any of a number of timings, such as the start of the variable display, when the variable display is being executed, or the end of the variable display. FIG. 10-45 (D2) shows a performance execution example 002AK626 in which a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in performance execution example 002AK625. When this variable display is started, a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA4, which has been determined as the timer performance pattern. When the timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA4, a special display is displayed using display image AKJ24 to announce the message "20 seconds left."

Figure 10-46 shows an example of timer standby performance and execution control of timer performance. In this execution control example, execution of the timer standby performance is started based on the occurrence of a start winning. After that, after the start of the variable display corresponding to two shift timings, the timer standby performance is controlled so that it can be executed in a continuous performance mode or a change performance mode until the variable display that is the target change starts. Execution of the timer performance starts in response to the start of the variable display that is the target change. The timer performance has a different executable period corresponding to the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4 that can be determined as a timer performance pattern. For example, when the timer performance is executed in the performance pattern TPA1, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ21 to notify the message "5 seconds left", and it is sufficient that the timer performance can be executed in the executable period of 5 seconds. Also, when the timer performance is executed in the performance pattern TPA2, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ22 to notify the message "10 seconds left", and it is sufficient that the timer performance can be executed in the executable period of 10 seconds. When a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA3, a specific display is displayed using display image AKJ23 to notify the message "15 seconds left," and the timer performance can be executed within the executable period of 15 seconds. When a timer performance is executed in performance pattern TPA4, a specific display is displayed using display image AKJ24 to notify the message "20 seconds left," and the timer performance can be executed within the executable period of 20 seconds. In this way, the timer performance may have a short or long period of specific display to notify a message using one of display images AKJ21 to AKJ24, depending on performance patterns TPA1 to TPA4. Note that the specific display is not limited to notifying a message using a display image, and may be capable of displaying any performance image.

In the example 002AKD22 of determining the timer performance pattern shown in FIG. 10-23(A), when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", the probability of determining the performance pattern with a longer timer performance execution period, such as either of the performance patterns TPA3 or TPA4, is higher than when the winning judgment result is not "jackpot". As a result, the expectation of the timer performance being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period than when the specific display is displayed for a short period. Also, in the example 002AKD21 of determining whether or not the timer performance is performed, when the winning judgment result is "jackpot", the probability of determining "with timer performance" which executes the timer performance when the number of reserved memories is large is higher than when the winning judgment result is not "jackpot". As a result, in the timer standby performance, the expectation of the timer performance being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period than when the winning judgment result is not "jackpot".

In the example 002AKD23 of determining the presentation pattern that becomes the standby presentation pattern shown in FIG. 10-23(B), presentation pattern TPB0 is determined to be the standby presentation pattern at a high rate when the timer presentation pattern is presentation pattern TPA1, and is determined to be the standby presentation pattern at a low rate when the timer presentation pattern is presentation pattern TPA2. In contrast, presentation pattern TPB1-1 is determined to be the standby presentation pattern at a high rate when the timer presentation pattern is presentation pattern TPA2, compared to when the timer presentation pattern is presentation pattern TPA1. Also, presentation pattern TPB1-2 is determined to be the standby presentation pattern at a high rate when the timer presentation pattern is presentation pattern TPA3, and is not determined to be the standby presentation pattern when the timer presentation pattern is other than presentation pattern TPA3. As a result, the rate at which the timer presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPA2 is higher and the rate at which the timer presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPA1 is lower when the timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-1 than when the timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB0. When the timer standby performance is executed in the performance pattern TPB1-2, the timer performance can be executed in the performance pattern TPB1-3, which has a longer executable time, than when the timer standby performance is executed in the performance pattern TPB0. Performance pattern TPB0 is a performance pattern that can execute the timer standby performance in a continuation performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change. Performance pattern TPB1-1 is a performance pattern that can execute the timer standby performance in a change display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to a first change display using the display image AKJ1. Performance pattern TPB1-2 is a performance pattern that can execute the timer standby performance in a change display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to a second change display using the display image AKJ2. Based on such settings, the executable period of the timer performance is longer when the timer standby performance is executed as a change performance in a change performance mode in which the specific display changes, than when the timer standby performance is executed in a continuation performance mode in which the specific display does not change, and the specific display can be displayed for a long period in the timer performance.

In example 002AKD23 of determining a presentation pattern that becomes a standby presentation pattern shown in FIG. 10-23(B), presentation pattern TPB2-1 is determined as a standby presentation pattern at a higher rate than presentation pattern TPB1-1 when the timer presentation pattern is presentation pattern TPA2, and is determined as a standby presentation pattern at a lower rate than presentation pattern TPB1-1 when the timer presentation pattern is TPA1. Presentation pattern TPB2-1 can also be determined as a standby presentation pattern at a predetermined rate when the timer presentation pattern is either presentation pattern TPA3 or TPA4. Presentation pattern TPB2-2 is determined as a standby presentation pattern at a higher rate than other presentation patterns when the timer presentation pattern is presentation pattern TPA4, and is not determined as a standby presentation pattern when the timer presentation pattern is other than presentation pattern TPA4. As a result, when the timer standby effect is executed in the performance pattern TPB2-1, the ratio of executing the timer effect in any of the performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4 is higher than when the timer standby effect is executed in the performance pattern TPB1-1, and the ratio of executing the timer effect in the performance pattern TPA1 is lower. When the timer standby effect is executed in the performance pattern TPB2-2, the timer effect can be executed in the performance pattern TPB1-4, which has a longer executable time, than when the timer standby effect is executed in either the performance pattern TPB1-1 or TPB1-2. The performance pattern TPB2-1 is a performance pattern that executes the timer standby effect in a continuous performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and can execute a previous stage performance by displaying the display image AKJ11 separately from the specific display. The performance pattern TPB2-2 is a performance pattern that executes the timer standby effect in a continuous performance mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and can execute a previous stage performance by displaying the display image AKJ12 separately from the specific display. The preliminary performance is not limited to displaying either the display image AKJ11 or AKJ12, but may be performed using any performance device, such as displaying any performance image on the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

Based on such settings, even if the timer standby performance is executed in a continuation performance mode in which the specific display does not change and the change performance is not executed, when the previous stage performance is executed, the executable period of the timer performance is longer than when the timer standby performance is executed as a change performance in a change performance mode in which the specific display changes, and the specific display can be displayed for a long period in the timer performance. Therefore, compared to when the timer standby performance is executed in a continuation performance mode in which the specific display does not change and the change performance is not executed, when the timer standby performance is executed in a change performance mode in which the specific display changes and the change performance is executed, the executable period of the timer performance is longer in the variable display that is the target change, so that the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the variable display that is the target change. On the other hand, even if the timer standby performance is executed in a continuation performance mode in which the specific display does not change and the change performance is not executed, when the previous stage performance is executed, the executable period of the timer performance is longer in the variable display that is the target change, so that the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the variable display that is the target change, compared to when the timer standby performance is executed in a change performance mode in which the specific display changes and the change performance is executed. In this way, even if the specific display does not change before the variable display that becomes the target change, whether or not the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the variable display that becomes the target change is set differently depending on whether or not the previous stage performance is executed, compared to when the specific display changes before the variable display that becomes the target change. The expectation that the specific display will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period than when it is displayed for a short period. As a result, when the previous stage performance is executed even if the specific display does not change before the variable display that becomes the target change, the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the variable display that becomes the target change, so that the change performance and the previous stage performance can be appropriately executed to increase attention to the specific display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In example 002AKD23 of determining a presentation pattern that becomes a standby presentation pattern shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB2-1, the proportion of timer presentations executed in any of presentation patterns TPA2 to TPA4 is higher than when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-1, and the proportion of timer presentations executed in presentation pattern TPA1 is lower. On the other hand, when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-2, the proportion of timer presentations executed in presentation pattern TPA3 is higher than when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB2-1. In contrast, when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB2-2, a timer presentation can be executed in presentation pattern TPA4, which is not the case when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-2. Presentation patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 enable the previous stage presentation to be executed in different presentation modes. Therefore, when the pre-stage performance can be executed in one of a plurality of performance modes, the proportion of the timer performance executed for a longer executable period can be different in accordance with the performance mode of the pre-stage performance than when the timer standby performance is executed in the change performance mode. This is not limited to performance patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, and it is sufficient that when any pre-stage performance can be executed in one of a plurality of performance modes, the proportion of the specific display displayed for a longer period after the variable display that is the target change is different in accordance with the performance mode of the pre-stage performance than when the change performance in which the specific display changes is executed.

In example 002AKD23 of determining the presentation pattern that becomes the standby presentation pattern shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), the rate at which a timer presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPA4 is higher when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TB2-2 than when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB2-1. Also, when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB2-1, a timer presentation can be executed in any of presentation patterns TPA1 to TPA3. In contrast, when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB2-2, a timer presentation is not executed in any of presentation patterns TPA1 to TPA3. Therefore, when the previous stage presentation can be executed in any of a plurality of presentation modes, the average length of time during which a specific display can be displayed in the timer presentation after the variable display that is the target variation can be made different in accordance with the presentation mode of the previous stage presentation. It is not limited to presentation patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, and when any pre-stage presentation can be executed in any of a number of presentation modes, it is sufficient that the expected value of the period during which a specific display can be displayed after the variable display that is the target change differs according to the presentation mode of the pre-stage presentation.

For example, when a timer standby effect is executed in effect pattern TPB0, the timer standby effect is executed in a continuation effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, it may be possible to execute a change display in which the specific display changes in the timer effect. In this way, when a timer standby effect is executed in a continuation effect mode in which the specific display does not change and a change effect is not executed, it may be possible to execute a change effect in which the specific display changes after the variable display that is the target change by changing the effect mode of the timer effect in the variable display that is the target change.

In example 002AKD23 of determining a presentation pattern that becomes a standby presentation pattern shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), a timer presentation can be executed in presentation pattern TPA3 when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-2, not when a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-1. When a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-1, a timer presentation can be executed in either presentation pattern TPA1 or TPA2, but a timer presentation cannot be executed in presentation pattern TPA3. When a timer standby presentation is executed in presentation pattern TPB1-2, a timer presentation cannot be executed in either presentation pattern TPA1 or TPA2. Therefore, when a timer standby presentation is executed in a change presentation mode in which a specific display changes and a change presentation is executed, the average length of time during which a specific display can be displayed in the timer presentation after the variable display that is the target change can be made different in accordance with the change presentation mode of the timer standby presentation. It is not limited to the presentation patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2, and when any change presentation can be performed in any of a number of presentation modes, it is sufficient that the expected value of the period during which a specific display can be displayed after the variable display that is the target change differs according to the presentation mode of the change presentation.

For example, when a timer wait effect is executed in effect pattern TPB0, the timer wait effect is executed in a continuation effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, a previous stage effect may be executable in the timer effect or the variable display that is the target variation. In response to the execution of such a previous stage effect, the specific display in the timer effect may be erased. For example, in the final stage of a reach effect that is a super reach, when a final notification effect is executed that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, control may be performed to erase the specific display.

Specific effects, etc. may be executed before and after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, but may be executed before and after a specific timing set in accordance with any performance progression. For example, when a variable display performance that becomes a pseudo consecutive change can be executed multiple times during the execution of one variable display, the timing at which the pseudo consecutive change starts for a specific time may be set as a specific timing, and specific effects, etc. may be executed before and after the specific timing. In such a case, the execution pattern of the specific performance may include a first pattern that inherits the performance mode of the specific performance after the specific timing, and a second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the specific timing, and when a predetermined performance such as a switching suggestion performance is executed after the execution of the specific performance in the second pattern, the specific performance may be switched to the first pattern and executed. In addition, when the first pattern that inherits the performance mode of the specific performance after the specific timing and the second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the specific timing are included, it is sufficient that the various performances described in the above embodiment can be executed.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 002AK)
(1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a determination means for determining whether or not the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the display before the display is changed;
a performance execution means for starting execution of a specific performance before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means;
The means of performance execution are:
As execution patterns of the specific effect, there are a first pattern in which the effect mode of the specific effect is inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination, and a second pattern in which the effect mode of the specific effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination,
When a predetermined performance is executed after starting execution of a specific performance in the second pattern, the specific performance can be switched to and executed in the first pattern.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a switching suggestion performance. The ability to switch to the first pattern and execute a specific performance may be, for example, when a character movement performance is executed in a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD.
According to such a configuration, when a predetermined effect is executed after the execution of a specific effect has started in the second pattern, it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect, thereby appropriately executing the predetermined effect and the specific effect so as to increase attention to the effects, thereby improving interest in the game.

(2) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a determination means for determining whether or not the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the display before the display is changed;
A specific effect execution means is provided for starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display that is the subject of the determination based on the determination of the determination means,
The specific effect execution means has, as execution patterns of the specific effect, a first pattern in which the effect mode of the specific effect is inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination is performed, and a second pattern in which the effect mode of the specific effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination is performed;
A suggestion effect execution means is further provided for executing a suggestion effect that suggests switching to the first pattern when a specific effect is being executed in the second pattern,
The specific performance execution means may be capable of continuing to execute the specific performance in the second pattern when a suggested performance is executed after starting execution of the specific performance in the second pattern and switching to the first pattern is not possible.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes step AKS123. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The suggestive performance may be, for example, a switching suggestive performance. The suggestive performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes step AKS043. The ability to continuously execute the specific performance in the second pattern may be, for example, in the case of performance execution example 002AK115.
According to such a configuration, if a suggested effect is executed and it is not possible to switch to the first pattern after the execution of a specific effect has begun in the second pattern, the specific effect can be continued in the second pattern, and the suggested effect and the specific effect can be appropriately executed to increase attention to the effects, thereby improving interest in the game.

(3) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a determination means for determining whether or not the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the display before the display is changed;
A specific effect execution means is provided for starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display that is the subject of the determination based on the determination by the determination means;
The specific performance execution means has, as execution patterns of the specific performance, a plurality of first patterns in which the performance mode of the specific performance is inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination, and a second pattern in which the performance mode of the specific performance is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination,
A special effect execution means is further provided for executing a special effect that makes a specific effect invisible;
The specific performance execution means is
In the second pattern, if a special effect is executed and becomes invisible after the execution of the specific effect is started, the specific effect can be ended without being restarted.
When a special effect is executed and becomes unvisible after execution of a specific effect has started in the first pattern, the specific effect may be able to be resumed in the first pattern having a different effect mode.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes step AKS123. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The special performance may be, for example, a character hiding performance. The special performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes step AKS035. The ability to end the specific performance without resuming it may be, for example, when it is determined to be "display end" in step AKS036. The ability to resume a specific presentation in a first pattern having a different presentation mode may occur, for example, when "resume display" is decided in step AKS036 and the display target for characters CH11 to CH14 changes.
According to such a configuration, when a special effect is executed and becomes unvisible after the execution of a specific effect has started, there are times when it is possible to end the specific effect without resuming it, and times when it is possible to resume the specific effect in a first pattern having a different presentation mode, and therefore it is possible to appropriately execute the special effect and the specific effect so as to increase attention to the effects, thereby improving interest in the game.

(4) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a determination means for determining whether or not the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the display before the display is changed;
a performance execution means for starting execution of a specific performance before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means;
The means of performance execution are:
As execution patterns of the specific effect, a first pattern is provided in which the effect mode of the specific effect is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the determination, and a plurality of second patterns are provided in which the effect mode of the specific effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the determination,
After starting the execution of a specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed;
The rate at which a specific effect is switched to the first pattern and executed may vary depending on the multiple second patterns.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The ability to switch to the first pattern and execute a specific performance may be, for example, a case where a character movement performance is executed with a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD. The ratio at which the specific performance is executed by switching to the first pattern may be different, for example, in the case of the display rate setting example 002AKE01.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of switching to the first pattern and executing a specific presentation is varied in response to a plurality of second patterns, so that the specific presentation can be appropriately executed so as to increase attention to the presentation, thereby improving interest in the game.

(5) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a determination means for determining whether or not the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the display before the display is changed;
a performance execution means for starting execution of a specific performance before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means;
The means of performance execution are:
As execution patterns of the specific effects, there are a plurality of first patterns in which the performance mode of the specific effects is inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the determination, and a second pattern in which the performance mode of the specific effects is not inherited after the variable display that is the subject of the determination,
After starting the execution of a specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed;
The ratio of a specific effect being executed in one of the plurality of first patterns may be different between a case where execution of a specific effect is started in the first pattern and a case where execution of a specific effect is started in the second pattern and then switched to the first pattern.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The determining means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific performance may be, for example, a character movement performance. The performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120. The first pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSA. The ability to switch to the first pattern and execute a specific performance may be, for example, a case where a character movement performance is executed in a performance pattern included in the movement performance type RSD. The ratio of the specific performance to be executed in which of the multiple first patterns is different may be, for example, a case where the display rate is set to 002AKE02.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of a specific effect being executed in one of the multiple first patterns differs between when execution of a specific effect is started in the first pattern and when execution of a specific effect is started in the second pattern and then switched to the first pattern, so that the specific effect can be executed appropriately to increase attention to the effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

(6) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a correspondence display means capable of displaying a correspondence display corresponding to the variable display;
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect for changing a display mode of the corresponding display from a first mode to a second mode having a higher expectation of being controlled to a favorable state than the first mode;
The display device may further include a history suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode after execution of the change effect has started.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The corresponding display may be, for example, a hold display or an active display. The change presentation may be, for example, an active display change presentation. The change presentation execution means may be, for example, a presentation control CPU 120 that controls the active display change presentation by step AKS131. The history suggestion presentation may be, for example, a presentation by the active display of presentation execution example 002AK204. The history suggestion presentation execution means may be, for example, a presentation control CPU 120 that controls the display state of the active display by step AKS131.
According to such a configuration, after the execution of the change effect has started, a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode can be executed, so that the previous display mode of the corresponding display can be recognized, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(7) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion effect execution means for executing a first effect and a second effect which is switched to after the first effect is executed as a suggestion effect that suggests that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state when the variable display is in a reach state;
A corresponding performance execution means is provided for executing a first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance and a second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance,
The corresponding performance execution means may be capable of starting execution of the second corresponding performance during execution of the first performance, before switching from the first performance to the second performance.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The suggestive performance may be, for example, a reach performance that becomes a super reach. The first performance may be, for example, a performance by displaying the character CH201 in the performance execution examples 002AK302 and 002AK303. The second performance may be, for example, a performance by displaying the character CH202 in the performance execution example 002AK304. The suggestive performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the reach performance by step AKS133. The first corresponding performance may be, for example, a performance by displaying a message in the performance execution example 002AK302. The second corresponding performance may be, for example, a performance by displaying a message in the performance execution example 002AK304. The corresponding performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that controls the message display by step AKS133. The ability to start execution of the second corresponding effect while the first effect is being executed may be achieved, for example, by displaying a message in effect execution example 002AK303.
According to such a configuration, before the first effect is switched to the second effect, the execution of the second corresponding effect can be started during the execution of the first effect, so that the change in effects and their relationship can be easily recognized, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(8) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification information and controlling it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
a transparent display means for displaying the identification information in a transparent manner according to a transition pattern in a special performance;
a special image display means capable of suggesting the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state by displaying a special image when the identification information is transparent;
The type of special image displayed may be different depending on whether the transition pattern is the first transition pattern or the second transition pattern.
Here, the identification information may be, for example, a performance pattern. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The special performance may be, for example, a reach-after performance. The special performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the reach-after performance by step AKS133. The transparent display means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that controls the transparent display of the performance pattern by any of the pattern transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 by step AKS133. The special image may be, for example, a performance image that can be displayed in the background display performance, step-up performance, and story performance. The special image display means may be, for example, an image display device 5 when the reach-after performance is executed by step AKS133. The type of special image to be displayed may be different, for example, a determination of the transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in the determination example 002AKD62.
According to this configuration, the type of special image displayed differs depending on whether the transition pattern is the first transition pattern or the second transition pattern, and the special presentation can be appropriately executed to increase attention to the transparent identification information display, thereby improving interest in the game.

(9) A gaming machine capable of controlling the display of identification information to be in an advantageous state for a player,
A special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
A transparent display means capable of displaying the identification information transparently according to a transition pattern in the special performance,
The special performance is
Including a specific period,
A first special effect capable of displaying identification information at a first transmittance from the start to the end of a specific period;
A second special effect is included in which the identification information can be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to a start of the specific period, and the identification information can be displayed at a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance in response to an end of the specific period.
The expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the second special effect is executed than when the first special effect is executed.
Here, the identification information may be, for example, a performance pattern. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The special performance may be, for example, a reach-after performance. The special performance execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the reach-after performance by step AKS133. The transparent display means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that controls the transparent display of the performance pattern in one of the pattern transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 by step AKS133. The first special performance may be, for example, a background display performance. The second special performance may be, for example, a step-up performance or a story performance. The high expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a determination rate in the determination example 002AKD61.
According to this configuration, the first special effect and the second special effect, which have different transmittance settings, can be appropriately executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(10) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
a determination means for determining whether or not the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state based on the display before the display is changed;
a change effect execution means for executing a change effect that changes a display mode of the specific display before the variable display that is the subject of the determination based on the determination by the determination means;
the specific display means is capable of displaying the specific display in a variable display corresponding to the specific display that is the target of the change performance for a longer period of time when the change performance is executed than when the change performance is not executed;
The expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period of time than when the specific display is displayed for a short period of time,
When a previous stage performance is executed without executing a change performance before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment, the specific display may be able to be displayed for a longer period after the variable display that is the subject of the judgment than when the change performance is executed before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The specific display may be, for example, a timer standby effect or a character display in a timer effect. The determination means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the start port switch passing process P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The change effect may be, for example, a timer standby effect executed in the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2. The change effect execution means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the timer standby effect in the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2 by step AKS127. The fact that the specific display can be displayed for a long period of time after the specific timing may be, for example, the determination rate of the effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB1-2 in the determination example 002AKD23. The high expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, the determination rate of the timer effect in the determination example 002AKD21, the determination rate of the effect pattern in the determination example 002AKD22, etc. The possibility of displaying a specific display for a long period of time after a specific timing may be, for example, the determination rate of the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 in the determination example 002AKD23, etc.
According to such a configuration, the change presentation and the preliminary presentation can be appropriately executed so as to increase the attention to the specific display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 ... Pachinko game machine 4A ... First special symbol display device 4B ... Second special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 50 ... Special variable winning ball device 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
120 ... Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can execute a variable display and control the display to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a determination means for determining whether or not the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A specific effect execution means capable of starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment based on the judgment of the judgment means,
The specific performance execution means has, as an execution pattern of the specific performance, a plurality of first patterns in which a performance mode is inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination, and a second pattern in which a performance mode is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination,
The apparatus further includes a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that is different from a reach effect and that makes the specific effect invisible,
The specific performance execution means includes:
In the case where the special effect is executed and becomes invisible after starting the execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be ended without being resumed;
When the special effect is executed and becomes invisible after the execution of the specific effect is started in the first pattern and before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment , the specific effect can be resumed in the first pattern of a presentation mode in which a ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is different from that before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment becomes invisible, before the variable display that is the subject of the judgment.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images